JP6694492B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine equipped with an effect device that can perform an effect by operating a movable body (see Patent Document 1). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

JP, 2013-013685, A

  In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect of production, a gaming machine equipped with a production device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed. Although the space inside the gaming machine is limited, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body. Here, when the operation ranges of the movable bodies are overlapped, when the plurality of movable bodies are simultaneously operated, the movable bodies may come into contact (interference) with each other. Usually, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur.

  However, if the movable body is not operating normally, or if the movable body is manually moved while the power is cut off, etc., the movable body does not have to consider such an abnormal situation. When the is operated, the movable bodies may interfere with each other. When the movable bodies come into contact with each other, the effect device may be damaged.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from coming into contact with each other when the operating ranges of the plurality of movable bodies overlap with each other. The purpose is to provide.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(1) A first movable body and a second movable body each operable between a first position and a second position which are different from each other,
Drive means for independently driving the first movable body and the second movable body between the first position and the second position;
A detection unit having a sensor A for detecting the first movable body and a sensor B for detecting the second movable body,
The operation range of each of the first movable body and the second movable body partially includes an overlapping range overlapping with each other, and the second positions of the first movable body and the second movable body are, respectively, Exists in the overlapping range in the operating range,
The drive means is
In performing a return operation for returning each of the first movable body and the second movable body to the origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
When either the sensor A or the sensor B is in the detection state as the detection result of the detection means, the first movable body and the second movable body are driven according to the drive procedure according to the detection result. Return to the origin position,
As a result of the detection by the detection means, when neither the sensor A nor the sensor B is in the detection state, one of the first movable body and the second movable body is returned to the origin position. And then driving the other movable body so as to return to the origin position according to a driving procedure corresponding to the position of the other movable body,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (1), when the detection means detects the presence of the first movable body, and when the detection means detects the presence of the second movable body, the detection of the detection means is performed. By driving the first movable body and the second movable body according to the drive procedure based on the result, it becomes possible to return the respective movable bodies to their respective origin positions without interfering with each other. On the other hand, when the detecting means does not detect the existence of the first movable body and the second movable body, first, one movable body is returned to the origin position, and then the other one is detected by the detecting means. By returning the other movable body to the origin position by the procedure according to the position of the movable body, it is possible to surely return the first movable body and the second movable body to the origin position.

(2) The gaming machine of (1),
Further comprising an abnormality detection means for detecting an abnormality according to the detection result of the detection means,
The drive means is
In performing a return operation for returning each of the first movable body and the second movable body to the origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
If the abnormality detecting unit has not detected an abnormality and the detection result of the detecting unit is either the sensor A or the sensor B, the driving procedure according to the detection result. According to the above, the first movable body and the second movable body are driven to return to the origin position,
When the abnormality detecting unit has not detected an abnormality and the detection result of the detecting unit is that neither the sensor A nor the sensor B is in the detection state, the first movable body and the second movable body are detected. One of the movable bodies is driven so as to return to the origin position, and then the other movable body is driven so as to be returned to the origin position according to a driving procedure according to the position of the other movable body.
It is characterized by

(3) The gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The drive means is
In performing a return operation for returning each of the first movable body and the second movable body to the origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
When at least one of the sensor A and the sensor B is not in the detection state as the detection result of the detection means, the first movable body and the second movable body are driven according to the drive procedure according to the detection result. To return to the origin position,
It is characterized by

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Further provided with a projector for projecting an image,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be projection targets of the projector, the first position is a position that is different for each movable body outside the projection range of the projector, and the second position is Is within the projection range of the projector, and the first movable body and the second movable body are positions to be projected by the projector,
It is characterized by

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from coming into contact with each other when the operation ranges of the plurality of movable bodies overlap each other.

It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a schematic layout diagram inside the housing of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a rear screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a perspective view when a display unit is attached to a cabinet. FIG. 41 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view taken along the line ZZ in FIG. 40, in which the functional components housed in the housing of the display unit are omitted, and is arranged above the gaming machine when the gaming machine is installed in the island facility. It is also a figure showing the fixed plate member of the island equipment. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a perspective sectional view of a display unit and a cabinet. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a reel screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating range of a front screen mechanism and the operating range of a reel screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism and a front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism, a reel screen drive mechanism, and a movable body base. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism and a reel screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view for explaining a sensor mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is a sequence diagram regarding operation of the front screen mechanism. It is a figure explaining the control sequence of the drive motor of a front screen drive mechanism when driving a front screen mechanism from a front standby position to a front exposure position. It is a sequence diagram regarding the operation of the reel screen mechanism. It is a figure explaining a control sequence of a drive motor of a reel screen drive mechanism when driving a reel screen mechanism from a reel standby position to a reel exposure position. It is a figure explaining a drive procedure of a front screen mechanism and a reel screen mechanism concerning an origin return operation. It is a perspective view of a cabinet and a medal supply port. It is a perspective view of a cabinet, a medal supply opening, and a medal supply mechanism. It is a perspective view of a medal supply mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a medal supply mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows arrangement | positioning of a back wall, a medal supply opening, a medal supply mechanism, and a scaler device. It is a front view of the gaming machine with the lower door mechanism opened. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is sectional drawing of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a front view, a top view, and a right side view of a coin guard. It is a front view of the gaming machine with the lower door mechanism opened. It is an explanatory view of the state where the hopper guide mechanism was attached to the bottom plate. It is a top view and a front view of a hopper guide mechanism. It is a perspective view of a hopper mechanism HP. It is explanatory drawing at the time of attaching a hopper mechanism HP normally. It is explanatory drawing at the time of attaching a hopper mechanism HP normally. It is explanatory drawing at the time of erroneously entering the hopper mechanism HP. It is a detailed view of the inside of a cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is an explanatory view of sheet metal. It is an explanatory view of sheet metal. It is a front view of the cabinet in the state where the upper door mechanism and the lower drive mechanism are opened. FIG. 6 is a side view of the cabinet with the upper door mechanism and the lower drive mechanism opened. It is a perspective view of the cabinet in the state where the lower drive mechanism is opened. It is explanatory drawing of an upper door lock mechanism. It is explanatory drawing of the upper door lock mechanism in a locked state. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine with the lower door mechanism removed from the cabinet. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine with a lower door mechanism opened. It is a detailed view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a side view of a state where a speaker DD25 and a power supply device are opposed to each other. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded view of the operation part and locking part of the maximum BET button. It is the figure which looked at the maximum BET button fixed to the 2nd base part from the inside of a cabinet. It is sectional drawing of a 2nd base part. It is an exploded view of an operation part. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine with the lower door mechanism opened. It is a rear perspective view of a lower door mechanism. It is an exploded view of a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of how the main control board is attached to the reel unit. It is an explanatory view of attaching a reel unit to a lower door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a reel device. It is an exploded perspective view of a reel unit. It is a perspective view of a motor mounting plate, a reel index, and a sensor part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a detection piece and a detection state. It is a perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor part. It is an exploded perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor part. It is an exploded perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment position of the base member with respect to a motor attachment plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment position of the sensor with respect to a base member. It is a top view of the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism opened. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism removed from the cabinet. It is explanatory drawing of an upper side hinge mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between an irradiation light device and a decoration unit. It is sectional drawing of a decoration unit. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of an upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of an upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a partially exploded perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is sectional drawing of a left panel mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide structure of the left light guide plate. It is a perspective view of a panel base, a top lens cover, and an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of a top lens cover and an upper left panel mechanism.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The game machine is a so-called pachi-slot machine. The gaming machine is a gaming machine that uses a gaming medium such as a coin, a medal, a gaming ball, or a token, or a card that stores information on the gaming value that is given to or given to the player. Below, it demonstrates as what uses a medal.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 to the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction), The right side and the left side viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. A direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-back direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-back direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the vertical direction or the height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 is configured by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 has a cabinet 21 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on the upper front side of the cabinet 21, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged on the lower front side of the cabinet 21. ing. The cabinet 21 accommodates a device used in the game (for example, a reel (also referred to as a drum) or the like). As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 21. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper and lower portions of the opening in the cabinet 21 can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. A transparent panel UD11 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window UD1.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit A is provided inside the cabinet 21 on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 211 in the cabinet 21. The intermediate support plate 211 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 21. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light containing an image and a screen device C that causes the image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is emitted. .

  Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and, for example, the position (projection distance or angle By projecting an image generated according to the effect information and the shape, it is possible to achieve a powerful and powerful effect.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward, and a screen that is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 and obliquely downward and rearward of the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged at the rear of the cabinet 21. The projector mechanism B2 has a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped base member B22. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Further, heat dissipation mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhausting mechanism B23 / B24 has a duct that circulates air and a fan that sends out air. By blowing out the air backward, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forced to the rear. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, a ventilation hole 21a of the cabinet 21 is arranged in the direction of air flow in the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with air to the outside of the machine through the ventilation hole 21a.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (direction of emission of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. is doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the front surface of the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. An angle adjustment hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are vertically symmetrically formed between the vertical angle adjustment holes B311 and B311.

  Meanwhile, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion and has a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with the left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11, and the screw penetrates the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screw penetrating the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31 is the same as that of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

  When the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screwing with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is shortened.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screw-fastened through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is provided between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is clamped. Thus, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. As a result, the distance between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Then, since the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B11 and the mirror mechanism at the positions where the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

  A spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 are connected to each other. It is sandwiched between. The screw inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 by the biasing force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes a horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged in front of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13 and B13 symmetrically arranged in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 is projected more forward than the cabinet 21 of FIG. At the center of the front side of the upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 is formed so as to project forward, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the projection so that the angle can be adjusted. .

  In addition, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have a protruding portion B131 that horizontally protrudes from the lower end portion. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 21, and is set to a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 21. Has been done. On the other hand, the second projecting portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 21, and is wider than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, in each of the side wall portions B13 and B13, the width of the second protruding portion B131b is wider than the width of the first protruding portion B131a. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space of the cabinet 21.

  A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a metal plate (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed on the entire surface of the porous plate B15 in a substantially evenly dispersed manner. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower side position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has an upper part B15a on the front side, an inclined part B15b on the middle side, and a lower part B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed by bending the rear side of the inclined portion B15b in the horizontal direction.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall parts B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a and cover it from below with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. There is. As shown in FIG. 10, the front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

  As will be described later in detail, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position that is arranged in an upper position that is a standby posture that prohibits appearance of an image by irradiation light, and a lower side that is an exposure posture that allows appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is tilted substantially parallel to and close to the tilted part B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without any flow resistance, and a plurality of air holes are generated. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and enhance the cooling efficiency.

  Further, the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that the eye position of the player located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. Even if the irradiation light device B exists on the horizontal line of the part and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line of sight position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being viewed.

(Display unit A: screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. As a result, the display unit A can unitize the irradiation light device B and the screen device C into a unit and handle them integrally.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 15, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 standing upright at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 standing upright at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected on the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the top side where the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 that form the screen housing C10 are independently formed into predetermined shapes, and predetermined functional parts such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be attached thereto. Has been As a result, even if the entire unit of the screen device C cannot be shared, it is possible to share the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 for each plate member. Further, since it is possible to partially change each plate member, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: bottom plate C1)
More specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape in a top view. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, there are provided a central placing portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right placing portion C12 and a left placing portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction centering on the central placing portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D into the central mounting portion C11. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 are positioned by positioning the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. It is placed as possible.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 5, the front side portion C14 contacts the front surface of the intermediate support plate 211 when the display unit A is installed while being mounted on the intermediate support plate 211 of the cabinet 21, so that the front side portion C14 of the cabinet 21 It is possible to perform rearward positioning. Then, the display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 21 by being screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 21 through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14. It is possible.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: right side plate C2, left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking the hands on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged beside the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal directions coincide with each other in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 21 in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. .. Specifically, an operator located on the front surface side of the cabinet 21 releases the screws by fastening the screws of the display unit A to the cabinet 21. Then, the user extends his / her hand into the cabinet 21 and holds the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands, and the display unit A is taken out of the cabinet 21. After that, as shown in FIG. 17, for example, a hand is extended into the screen device C from one operation opening C21 of the removed display unit A, and the crank gear E21 which is viewed in the horizontal direction is rotated from the operation opening C21. Thus, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, the hand is extended from the front of the opening of the cabinet 21 into the space between the side wall 212 of the cabinet 21 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C to open the operation opening C21. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A from the cabinet 21.

  Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor housing portion C22 houses the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the relay board CK is provided on the back surface. The relay board CK allows a plurality of signal lines in the display unit A to be aggregated to perform wiring with the outside of the display unit A at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so that the relay board CK is placed in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21. That is, the relay board CK is arranged in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 2111 of the intermediate support plate 211 that supports the display unit A is arranged below the relay board CK, and the signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

  As a result, the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C to facilitate wiring work, and eliminates the need to secure an installation space for the relay substrate CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom in designing the device C is expanded.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet 21. After that, by extending the hand from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 which is seen in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen mechanism)
Inside the screen casing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause an image to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between a front exposed position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position exists in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided rotatably between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the turning distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the turning distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are different from each other so that the overlapping of the operation regions due to the rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set higher than the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. As a result, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

  Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on the condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is at the standby position. This prevents interference when the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 are rotated.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection portion D1, a right reflection portion D2, a left reflection portion D3, and a bottom reflection portion D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, respectively.

  The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflective portions as long as the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of reflective surfaces at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose curvature center point is located on the front surface side and which has continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

  The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged to face the player on the front side, and most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B arranged in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D is reflected forward. Is set to. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflection portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front reflection portion D1. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width of the front reflection portion D1 in the left-right direction. This makes it easier for the right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 to reflect the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface toward the front reflecting portion D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. In addition, with respect to the lower surface reflecting portion D4 as well, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface is easily directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction, part of the irradiation light is directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the reflection surface is set lower than the lightness of each reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected by the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents white blur due to light mixing due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In addition, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, it is possible to reduce the reflection of the irradiation light on the front reflection portion D1 in the other reflection portions D2, D3, and D4, and thus it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflection portion D1.

As the lightness, the brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as it can be expressed in relative values with respect to white.

  The lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the light reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value that is about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is set to the front screen. The color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be made black. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the same as that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. A black pigment may be added to the coating material applied to the base material.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only white pigments among white pigments and black pigments, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white pigments and black pigments may be included. In addition, the ratio of black pigment to white pigment in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is higher than that in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or It may be higher (about 10 to 20%). As the coating material to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known coating materials for screens can be appropriately adopted and can be adjusted according to the type of the screen (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

  The black pigment is not included in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the lightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as the peripheral walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4) and the inside of the screen casing C10. It is desirable to reduce the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen for the surrounding wall, so that the brightness is low. The lower the better. That is, it is preferable that the color of the surrounding wall be closer to black.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have The front screen member E11 is formed by applying screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 is configured so that the projection surface E11a is formed flat so that an image without distortion appears when the irradiation light is irradiated.

  On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set to have two levels of depth, a deep part and a shallow part. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly across both ends in the lateral direction passing through the central portion.

  As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the step E121a at the peripheral edge and the linear step E121b passing through the center, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing the projection surface E11a to be distorted.

  The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. The first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b are three-dimensionally formed by unevenness, for example, a pattern related to a game effect.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are formed separately and then integrated by being bonded with an adhesive. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 is in a state where the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to sink marks on the projection surface E11a.

  The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

  The flat panel forming the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material for the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin) that can cause sink marks when injection molding is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit A: screen device C: front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right front screen drive mechanism E2 connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has an upper end portion (one end portion) connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 15 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 is rotatable at the upper end and the lower end (the other end) about the intermediate position E22a.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 25, the center line in the upper region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is vertically oriented in the standby posture. Is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line that passes through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side inclines forward rather than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight lines and a curved line connecting the ends of the two straight lines. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b is set such that the surface of the groove wall surface E22b1 corresponding to the straight portion is parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two straight line portions) is substantially equal to the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. The upper end of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 contacts the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, and the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the slide member. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

  As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position is in the direction of giving all the components of this force. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having 0 degrees of freedom, in which the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends and the slide member E26 is a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning trajectory of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22. The tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22 because the tangential direction of the turning trajectory is parallel to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts to rotate.

  When the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is slidable with the slide groove E22b so as to be movable along the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface to form a two-degree-of-freedom link. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates about the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is 0 in the stopped state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, and gradually increases to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture (FIG. 27). After reaching the maximum speed, the speed gradually decreases, and the stopped state becomes 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are reached. As a result, the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in the state where the angular acceleration is small (inertia moment), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce breakdown and wear of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25) due to overload.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via the shaft member E3 so that the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. There is.

(Display unit A: screen device C: reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 formed of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. And a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the.

  The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface which is the rotation center side. This pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position. In addition, the surface of the reel screen portion F11 has a pattern formed on the peripheral portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral portion serves as the projection surface. On the projection surface, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, an image can be displayed by irradiation of irradiation light.

  One ends of the left and right reel screen support parts F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen part F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a protrusion not shown. The protruding portion is horizontally protruded to the outside of each reel screen support portion F12 / F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to serve as a rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The game machine is a so-called pachi-slot machine. The gaming machine is a gaming machine that uses a gaming medium such as a coin, a medal, a gaming ball, or a token, or a card that stores information on the gaming value that is given to or given to the player. Below, it demonstrates as what uses a medal.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 to the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction), The right side and the left side viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. A direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-back direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-back direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the vertical direction or the height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 is configured by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on the upper front side of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged on the lower front side of the cabinet G. have.

  Further, in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction are formed at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper and lower portions of the opening in the cabinet G can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. A transparent panel UD11 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window UD1.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the interior of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire gaming machine 1, and the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 33, the display unit A is replaceably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light containing an image and a screen device C that causes the image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is emitted. .

  Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and, for example, the position (projection distance or angle By projecting an image generated according to the effect information and the shape, it is possible to achieve a powerful and powerful effect.

  The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 includes a projector cover B1 of the irradiation light device B and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. Although details will be described later, the screen housing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 34, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward, a screen that is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2, and the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 is arranged obliquely downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged in the rear part of the cabinet G. The projector mechanism B2 has a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped base member B22. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Further, heat dissipation mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhausting mechanism B23 / B24 has a duct that circulates air and a fan that sends out air. By blowing out the air backward, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forced to the rear. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 30, the ventilation hole G3a of the cabinet G is arranged in the air flow direction in the heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with air to the outside of the machine through the ventilation hole G3a.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 34, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (direction of emission of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 35, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. is doing. As shown in FIG. 36, the mirror holder B31 has a front surface formed in a rectangular plate shape. An angle adjustment hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are vertically symmetrically formed between the vertical angle adjustment holes B311 and B311.

  Meanwhile, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion and has a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with the left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11, and the screw penetrates the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screw penetrating the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31 is the same as that of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

  When the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screwing with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is shortened.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screw-fastened through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is provided between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is clamped. Thus, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. As a result, the distance between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Then, since the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B11 and the mirror mechanism at the positions where the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

  A spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 are connected to each other. It is sandwiched between. The screw inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 by the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjusting hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 38, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 that inclines upward from the rear toward the front at the front portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 39, the projector cover B1 includes a horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and symmetrically arranged left and right directions of the upper wall portion B12. It has the side wall parts B13 and B13 that are formed. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 is projected forward of the cabinet G (see FIG. 33). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the upper wall portion B12 so as to project forward, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the projection so that the angle can be adjusted. There is.

  In addition, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have a protruding portion B131 that protrudes from the lower end portion in the left-right horizontal direction. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the first protruding portions B131a protruding from the side wall portions B13 and B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the opening of the cabinet G. On the other hand, the second protruding portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the second protruding portions B131b protruding from the side wall portions B13 and B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the rear space portion of the cabinet G. That is, the side wall portions B13 and B13 are formed such that the distance between the tips of the second protrusions B131b in the left-right direction is larger than the distance between the tips of the first protrusions B131a in the left-right direction. This allows the projector cover B1 to cover most of the internal space of the cabinet G.

  In addition, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at the tip of the second protrusion B131b. When fixing the projector cover B1 to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 33), screws are screwed into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 through the screw holes B131C. Further, since the protruding portions B131 are horizontally protruded from the lower end portions of the respective side wall portions B13 and B13, the protruding portions B131 and the side wall portions B13 are recessed from the front end thereof at both side end portions of the projector cover B1. B132 is continuously formed rearward.

  As shown in FIG. 40, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the recess B132 and the cabinet G define a space BS. Further, the shapes of the upper wall portion B12 and the side wall portion B13 of the projector cover B1 are such that the distance between the lower end portion of each side wall portion B13 and the tip end portion of the second protruding portion B131b protruding from this lower end portion is The front portion of the second protrusion B131b is configured to be larger than the rear portion thereof (see FIG. 39). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes larger than the rear space. Further, when the display unit A is mounted in the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the front space of the space BS at least partially overlap each other in a top view. This space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the game machine 1 on the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the game machine is installed and fixed to the island equipment, the fixing plate member OC of the island equipment is arranged above the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G. The space BS is a space in which a nail extending from the plate member G42 attached to the upper surface wall G4 to the fixed plate member OC of the island facility can be driven from inside the cabinet G.

  As described above, even when the display unit A is housed in the cabinet G with almost no gap between the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 and the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, the display unit A Between the cabinet G and the cabinet G, a space BS for securing and installing the island equipment is secured. As a result, an operator can perform nailing work using the space BS from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened, and as a result, the display unit A is damaged. While preventing, it becomes possible to nail the gaming machine 1 to the fixing plate member OC of the island facility while the display unit A is housed in the cabinet G.

  In addition, the nails that fix the gaming machine 1 and the fixed plate member OC are driven not to the metal cabinet G but to the wooden board member G42 that is softer than the cabinet, so the gaming machine 1 is easily performed. Can be installed in the island facility.

  As a modified example, the material of the plate member G42 is not limited to wood, and various materials can be used as long as they are soft members softer than the cabinet G. Further, the fixing method of the gaming machine 1 to the island equipment is not limited to nailing, and various fixing methods such as screwing can be adopted.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 42, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a metal plate (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed on the entire surface of the porous plate B15 in a substantially evenly dispersed manner. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower side position. The perforated plate B15 has an upper side portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower side portion B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed by bending the rear side of the inclined portion B15b in the horizontal direction.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall parts B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a and cover it from below with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. There is. Further, the inclined portion B15b is arranged so as to surround the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 in a top view. Then, as shown in FIG. 38, the inclination angle of the inclined portion B15b (the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane) is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface B2a1. A front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

  As will be described later in detail, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position that is arranged in an upper position that is a standby posture that prohibits appearance of an image by irradiation light, and a lower side that is an exposure posture that allows appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is tilted substantially parallel to and close to the tilted part B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without any flow resistance, and a plurality of air holes are generated. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and enhance the cooling efficiency.

  Further, the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that the eye position of the player located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 43, for example. Even if the irradiation light device B exists on the horizontal line of the part and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line of sight position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being viewed.

(Display unit A: screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 44, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. For example, as described above, the screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C via the screw holes B131C formed in the projecting portion B131 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the display unit A can unitize the irradiation light device B and the screen device C into a unit and handle them integrally.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen mechanism)
Inside the screen casing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause an image to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have different shapes in order to diversify the image expression. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. Note that, of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the front screen mechanism E1 is larger and heavier. Therefore, driving the front screen mechanism E1 requires a larger driving force than driving the reel screen mechanism F1. Detailed structures of the screen mechanisms D, E1, F1 and the screen drive mechanisms E2, F2 will be described later.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10)
As described above, the screen device C has the box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 45, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 standing upright at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 standing upright at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected on the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the top side where the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4, which form the screen housing C10, are separately molded into predetermined shapes, and predetermined functional components such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. Has been As a result, even if the entire unit of the screen device C cannot be shared, it is possible to share the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 for each plate member. Further, since it is possible to partially replace each plate member, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1. The functional parts positioned and arranged with respect to each plate member will be described in detail later.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, there are provided a central placing portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right placing portion C12 and a left placing portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction centering on the central placing portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D into the central mounting portion C11. The right mounting portion C12 mounts the right movable body base C5 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left mounting portion C13 mounts the left movable body base C6 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6. The right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 are three-dimensionally formed with concaves and convexes on the inner side surfaces in the left-right direction. That is, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 also function as decorative members. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 can be positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. The front side portion C14 contacts the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1 when the display unit A is installed while being mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 33) of the cabinet G, so that the front side portion C14 moves rearward in the cabinet G. It is possible to position. The display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet G by being screwed to the front surface of the cabinet G through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14. It is possible.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: right side plate C2, left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking the hands on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged beside the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal directions coincide with each other in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is incorporated in the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. .. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet G releases the screw by fastening the screw of the display unit A to the cabinet G. Then, the user extends his / her hand into the cabinet G, holds the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands, and takes the display unit A out of the cabinet G. After that, as shown in FIG. 47, for example, the hand is extended into the screen device C through one of the operation openings C21 of the removed display unit A, and the crank gear E21 which is viewed in the horizontal direction is rotated through the operation opening C21. Thus, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, the hand is extended from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C to open the operation opening C21. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, even if the display unit A is not removed from the cabinet G, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released.

  Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged by the motor housing portion C22. The right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 each have a first support portion C23 that rotatably supports a gear shaft E21a of a crank gear E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2, and an intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. A second support portion C24 that rotatably supports the shaft member E3 that serves as the gear shaft is formed. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B of the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged between the right movable body base C5 and the right side plate C2 in the left-right direction. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A is arranged between the left movable body base C6 and the left side plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 48, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a recess CO for positioning and arranging the relay board CK is formed in the lower portion of the back surface thereof. The relay board CK is a relay for relaying wiring (not shown) between various functional components in the display unit A (for example, the projector mechanism B2 and the like) and various functional components other than the display unit A (main control substrate MS and the like). It is a substrate.

  An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is assembled in the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G. After that, by extending the hand from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 which is seen in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

  The back plate C4 is arranged in front of the rear ends of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. Thus, as shown in FIG. 49, when the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3 of the screen device C, and The space GS is defined by the back plate C4. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. Thereby, even if the relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, it is possible to prevent the relay board CK from interfering with the back wall G3 of the cabinet G due to the space GS.

  Further, a through hole G11 is formed in the intermediate support plate G1 at a position facing the space GS. The through hole G11 is formed such that its opening surrounds the relay substrate CK in a top view. Then, the relay board CK is arranged so that the connector CK1 to which the wiring from the device (main control board MS or the like) housed in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected to the through hole G11. Thereby, the relay board CK of the display unit A and the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G are electrically connected by inserting the wiring from the device accommodated in the lower space into the through hole G11. This can be done by connecting to CK1.

  By thus arranging the relay board CK on the outside of the screen device C, the wiring work is facilitated, and it becomes unnecessary to secure an installation space for the relay substrate CK in the screen device C, The degree of freedom in designing the screen device C is expanded. Further, the heat generated from the relay board CK can be easily discharged to the outside of the machine through the ventilation hole G3a formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G.

  Further, the wiring connecting the relay board CK arranged in the upper space of the cabinet G and the equipment housed in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through hole G11 formed in the rear portion of the intermediate support plate G1. Therefore, it becomes easy to arrange the wiring behind the various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in wiring arrangement.

  Since the relay board CK is arranged in the rear part of the cabinet G, it is difficult for light to reach the relay board CK, and as a result, it is difficult to connect the wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. In some cases, Therefore, in order to facilitate the connection of the wiring from the device housed in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes below the intermediate support plate G1 through the through hole G11. It may be configured so as to project into the. The color of the connector CK1 may be a color having a high light reflectance (for example, white).

  As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2, and the gear shaft E21a and the shaft member E3 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay board CK is positioned and arranged with respect to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the drive mechanisms F2 and E2, and the relay board CK are positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2 and C3, and the back plate C4, respectively, and are different from each other. Positioned on the plate. Therefore, even if the display unit A as a whole cannot be shared among the models, it can be shared among the models in the plate unit. As a result, it becomes possible to manufacture the display unit at a lower cost than when manufacturing the display unit for each model.

  Further, since the plates C1 to C4 of the screen housing C10 are connected by screw fastening, the plates C1 to C4 can be released from the connection by loosening the screws. That is, the screen housing C10 is assembled so that the plates C1 to C4 can be replaced. As a result, the functional components of the display unit can be replaced on a plate-by-plate basis, and the specifications of the display unit A can be changed while reusing the functional components that are not the replacement target of the display unit A. ..

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right movable body base C5 is arranged on the left inside of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Further, the left movable body base C6 is arranged on the right inside of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A. As a result, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, which are decorative members, make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the drive mechanisms E2 and F2. As a result, the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate C1 is formed with the recesses for arranging the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, these can be easily positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 50, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 51, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between a front exposed position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position exists in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes the projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is placed at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes the projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes the projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes the projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the axial direction of the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the axial direction of the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 coincide with the left-right direction. The operation ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 due to the rotation partially overlap each other. Therefore, when one of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged in the overlapping range where the operation ranges overlap, when the other screen is rotated, the other screen comes into contact.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the turning distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the turning distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The front standby position is located outside the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel standby position is located outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, each of the front standby position and the reel standby position is arranged in the operating range excluding the overlapping range.

  On the other hand, the front exposure position is located within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel exposure position is located within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, the front exposure position and the reel exposure position are arranged in the overlapping range in the operation range. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be located at the reel exposure position. Further, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be located at the front exposure position.

  The rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 are set so as to minimize the overlapping of the operating ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 due to the rotation. Have been different. Specifically, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. Specifically, the rotation center axis FG is arranged above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 arranged at the front exposure position. As a result, the distance between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG can be shortened, so that the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposed position can be reduced. By reducing the operating range in this way, it is possible to increase the size of the front screen mechanism E1 even in a limited space in the display unit A. Both the rotation center axis FG and the rotation center axis RG are arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on the condition that one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is at the standby position. This prevents interference when the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 are rotated. Details of operations of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed to the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection portion D1, a right reflection portion D2, a left reflection portion D3, and a bottom reflection portion D4. The reflecting surfaces of the reflecting portions D1 to D4 are projection surfaces onto which the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. There is.

  The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflective portions as long as the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of reflective surfaces at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose curvature center point is located on the front surface side and which has continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

  The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged to face the player on the front side, and most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B arranged in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D is reflected forward. Is set to. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflection portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front reflection portion D1. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width of the front reflection portion D1 in the left-right direction. This makes it easier for the right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 to reflect the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface toward the front reflecting portion D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. In addition, with respect to the lower surface reflecting portion D4 as well, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface is easily directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction, part of the irradiation light is directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the reflection surface is set lower than the lightness of each reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected by the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents white blur due to light mixing due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In addition, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, it is possible to reduce the reflection of the irradiation light on the front reflection portion D1 in the other reflection portions D2, D3, and D4, and thus it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflection portion D1.

As the lightness, the brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as it can be expressed in relative values with respect to white.

  The lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the light reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value that is about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is set to the front screen. The color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be made black. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the same as that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. A black pigment may be added to the coating material applied to the base material.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only white pigments among white pigments and black pigments, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white pigments and black pigments may be included. In addition, the ratio of black pigment to white pigment in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is higher than that in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or It may be higher (about 10 to 20%). As the coating material to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known coating materials for screens can be appropriately adopted and can be adjusted according to the type of the screen (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

  The black pigment is not included in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the lightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as the peripheral walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4) and the inside of the screen casing C10. It is desirable to reduce the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen for the surrounding wall, so that the brightness is low. The lower the better. That is, it is preferable that the color of the surrounding wall be closer to black.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 54, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have The front screen member E11 is formed by applying screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has a flat projection surface E11a.

  On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set to have two levels of depth, a deep part and a shallow part. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly across both ends in the lateral direction passing through the central portion.

  As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the step E121a at the peripheral edge and the linear step E121b passing through the center, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing the projection surface E11a to be distorted.

  The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. The first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b are three-dimensionally formed by unevenness, for example, a pattern related to a game effect.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are formed separately and then integrated by being bonded with an adhesive. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 is in a state where the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to sink marks on the projection surface E11a.

  The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

  The flat panel forming the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material for the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin) that can cause sink marks when injection molding is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit A: screen device C: front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right front screen drive mechanism E2 connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position (in the standby posture), the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end toward the front end. As configured. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 of the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2.

  As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is placed at the front standby position, the posture of the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined so as to be inclined upward from the rear end portion to the front end portion, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is parallel to the horizontal plane. Compared to the case where the posture is set, it is possible to suppress the irradiation light emitted by the irradiation light device B from being blocked by the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when it is located at the front standby position can be closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be upsized even within the limited space of the display unit A. In addition, as described above, since the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has the inclined surface B2a1, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when it is placed at the front standby position is set to the projector mechanism B2. You can get closer. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be further increased in size.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is positioned such that the upper end portion (one end portion) of the crank member E22 is an upper portion when the front end position of the front end of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the front exposure position (in the exposure position). Is linked to.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the crank member E22 is pivotally supported by the right movable body base C5 (see FIG. 45) at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 is capable of rotating the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) about the intermediate position E22a as the rotation center. The intermediate position E22a coincides with the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1.

  As described above, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 arranged at the front exposure position. Further, the crank member E22 has its upper end portion (one end portion) connected to a position on the rear surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 which is an upper portion when the crank member E22 is disposed at the front exposed position (in the exposed position). .. With the above configuration, the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposure position can be reduced, and thus the front screen mechanism E1 can be increased in size.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as in FIG. 57, the center line in the upper region (a straight line that passes through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is vertically oriented in the standby posture. Is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line that passes through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side inclines forward rather than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight lines and a curved line connecting the ends of the two straight lines. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b is set such that the surface of the groove wall surface E22b1 corresponding to the straight portion is parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two straight line portions) is substantially equal to the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. The upper end of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 contacts the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. As shown in FIG. 55, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right side plate C2. The gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 has a line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b between the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the slide member E26 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point.

  As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the gear shaft E21a moves in the direction in which all components of this force are applied. Exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having 0 degrees of freedom, in which the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end. Even when E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the second support portion C24 of the right side plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning trajectory of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 60, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b slides to the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22. The tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22 because the tangential direction of the turning locus is set so as to be orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the member E26. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts to rotate.

  When the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is slidable with the slide groove E22b so as to be movable along the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface to form a two-degree-of-freedom link. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates about the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the main control board MS.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is 0 in the stopped state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, and gradually increases to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture (see FIG. 59). ), The speed gradually decreases after reaching the maximum speed, and the stopped state becomes 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are set. As a result, the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in the state where the angular acceleration is small (inertia moment), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce breakdown and wear of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25) due to overload.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically.

  The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3.

  Specifically, the shaft member E3 extends in the left-right direction, and the intermediate gears E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected to both ends of the shaft member E3. The shaft member E3 is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D in a space sandwiched between the back plate C4 and the fixed screen mechanism D (see FIG. 53).

  In the above structure, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the shaft member E3 rotate integrally. Then, as the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated about the rotation center axis FG and the front standby position is reached. It will move to and from the front exposed position.

  As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B by the shaft member E3, the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 is applied to the two crank members E22. It is possible to transmit evenly. Therefore, as compared with the case where the intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3, it is possible to prevent the driving load from being concentrated on one of the two crank members E22. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B arranged to the right of the fixed screen mechanism D, it does not hinder the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D.

  In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as the rotating shaft of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, the degree of freedom in disposing the shaft member E3 is increased, and the shaft member E3 can be arranged so as not to obstruct the disposition of another accessory such as the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging another accessory while maintaining the rotation range and size of the front screen mechanism E1 at a desired degree.

  Further, since the shaft member E3 is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D, the light projected on the fixed screen mechanism D is not blocked by the shaft member E3. Further, since the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, compared with the case where it is arranged behind the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Thus, the length between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG (the length of the crank member E22) can be shortened. Therefore, even when the space inside the cabinet G is limited and the display unit A cannot be upsized, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained at a desired level.

(Display unit A: screen device C: reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is composed of a curved flat plate. The reel screen mechanism F1 has an arcuate shape in a side view, which is curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction. On the surface of the reel screen mechanism F1, a pattern is formed on the peripheral portion, and the inner peripheral area of the peripheral portion is the projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is an arc surface that is convex on the upstream side in the irradiation direction of light from the projector mechanism B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position. In addition, a pattern is formed on the rear surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that is on the rotation center side. This pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between the reel standby position and the reel exposed position by the driving force of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the projection surface F1a can display an image by irradiation of irradiation light.

(Display unit A: screen device C: reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21 and F21, an arcuate gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 and F21 is connected to the rear surface of the right end portion and the rear surface of the left end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1. Support shafts F21a and F21a that project outward in the left-right direction are formed on the outer surfaces of the other ends of the two arm members F21 and F21. The support shafts F21a and F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. Accordingly, the two arm members F21 can rotate about the support shafts F21a and F21a. The support shafts F21a and F21a coincide with the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The arcuate gear F22 is fixed to the tip end portion of the support shaft F21a arranged on the right side of the two support shafts F21a and F21a. A motor shaft gear F23 is meshed with the arcuate gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the main control board MS.

  In the above structure, when the drive motor E25 is driven under the control of the main control board MS, the motor shaft gear E24 rotates. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the arcuate gear F22 rotates. Then, as the arm member F21 is rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the arcuate gear F22, the reel screen mechanism F1 rotates about the rotation center axis RG, and the reel standby position and the reel exposure position. Will work between and.

(Display unit A: screen device C: sensor mechanism CS)
As described above, the operating ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 partially overlap each other (see FIG. 53). The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different drive mechanisms. That is, the drive of the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive of the reel screen mechanism F1 are not linked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to know the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) uses the front standby position as the origin position and grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from this origin position. ing. Similarly, with the reel standby position as the origin position, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is grasped based on the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from this origin position.

  However, when the operations of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are not normally performed, or when the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are manually moved during the power-off, the main control is performed. The substrate MS cannot grasp the accurate positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, they may interfere with each other.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism CS for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, the main control board MS executes a return operation for returning the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the origin position (standby position) based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism CS.

  The crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is provided with a light shielding portion E22d in the upper region and a light shielding portion E22e in the lower region. A light blocking portion F1b is formed on the rear surface of the right end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The sensor mechanism CS has three sensors CS1 to CS3. These sensors CS1 to CS3 are transmissive optical sensors, and are formed in a substantially U shape as shown in FIG. One end portion of the U-shaped open side is a light emitting portion that emits light, and the other end portion is a light receiving portion that receives light. Then, these sensors CS1 to CS3 output a Low signal to the main control board MS when the light receiving section receives the light emitted from the light emitting section, the light emitted from the light emitting section is blocked, and the light receiving section operates. It is configured to output a Hi signal to the main control board MS when it cannot receive light.

  The sensor CS1 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position. The sensor CS1 is fixedly arranged on the rotation trajectory of the light shielding portion E22d of the crank member E22. Specifically, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position (see FIG. 65), the sensor CS1 sandwiches the light shielding part E22d between the light emitting part and the light receiving part, and the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position. When it is not in the position (see FIG. 66), it is fixedly arranged at a position where the light-shielding portion E22d is not sandwiched between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion. Therefore, the sensor CS1 outputs a Hi signal to the main control board MS when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position and a Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is not in the front standby position.

  The sensor CS2 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 is present at the front exposure position. The sensor CS2 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light shield E22e of the crank member E22. Specifically, the sensor CS2 sandwiches the light shielding portion E22e between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position (see FIG. 66), and the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position. When it does not exist (see FIG. 65), it is fixedly arranged at a position where the light-shielding portion E22e is not sandwiched between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion. Therefore, the sensor CS2 outputs a Hi signal to the main control board MS when the front screen mechanism E1 is present at the front exposure position and a Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is not present at the front exposure position.

  The sensor CS3 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position. The sensor CS3 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light shield F1b in the reel screen mechanism F1. Specifically, the sensor CS2 sandwiches the light shielding part F1b between the light emitting part and the light receiving part when the reel screen mechanism F1 is present at the reel standby position (see FIG. 65), and the reel screen mechanism F1 moves at the reel standby position. 67 (see FIG. 67), it is fixedly arranged at a position where the light-shielding portion F1b is not sandwiched between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion. Therefore, the sensor CS3 outputs a Hi signal to the main control board MS when the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position and a Low signal when the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position.

  In the above configuration, the detection signals from the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 indicate whether the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the front exposure position, or the intermediate position which is a position between these positions. There is. The detection signal from the sensor CS3 indicates whether the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position or a position other than the reel standby position.

  Further, as described above, since the front standby position and the reel standby position are arranged in the overlapping range in the operation range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposure position, The reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be arranged at the reel exposure position. Therefore, when the sensor CS2 detects that the front screen is at the front exposure position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not at the reel exposure position.

(Operation control of the front screen mechanism E1)
Next, prior to describing the origin return operation, operation control of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 during normal operation will be described. The main control board MS controls the drive motor E25 to rotate the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposure position. The rotation operation of the front screen mechanism E1 is executed on condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position.

  As mentioned earlier, the main control board MS uses the front standby position as the origin position and grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 by the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from this origin position. For example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the number of steps is 210, it can be understood that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps is 20-21, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is switched between the Hi signal and the Low signal, and when the number of steps is 190-191, the detection of the sensor CS2 is performed. The signal switches between a Hi signal and a Low signal.

  The main control board MS controls the rotation direction and rotation speed of the front screen mechanism E1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and pulse width of the drive motor E25. Hereinafter, in the drive motor E25, the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is + direction, and the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position is − direction. And

  FIG. 69 shows an example of a control sequence of the drive motor E25 when rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor E25 is excited by a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 1), and then the drive motor E25 is pulsed in the + direction by a pulse width of 2.2 ms. To drive 210 steps (step 2). As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 rotates from the front standby position to the front exposed position. After that, the drive motor E25 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 3). The above is the control sequence when rotating the front standby position to the front exposure position. The control sequence for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is the sequence in which the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 according to step 2 in the control sequence of FIG. 69 is the − direction. do it.

(Operation control of reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, normal operation control of the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. The main control board MS controls the drive motor F24 to rotate the reel screen mechanism F1 between the reel standby position and the reel exposed position. The rotation operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is executed on condition that the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the main control board MS uses the reel standby position as the origin position and grasps the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 by the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from this origin position. For example, when the number of steps is 140, it can be understood that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps is 1-2, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal.

  The main control board MS controls the rotation direction and rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and pulse width of the drive motor F24. Hereinafter, in the drive motor F24, the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is + direction, and the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position is − direction. And

  FIG. 71 shows an example of a control sequence of the drive motor F24 when rotating the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor F24 is excited by a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 1), and then the drive motor F24 is moved in the + direction by a pulse width of 4 ms for 8 ms. The number of steps is driven (procedure 2). Accordingly, the rotation of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position is started, and the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is accelerated. After that, the drive motor F24 is driven 122 steps in the + direction with a pulse width of 3 ms (procedure 3). After that, the drive motor F24 is driven 122 steps in the + direction with a pulse width of 5 ms (procedure 4). As a result, the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is reduced. Then, the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 5). The above is the control sequence when rotating the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. The control sequence for rotating the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position is such that the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 according to steps 2 to 4 in the control sequence of FIG. 71 is the − direction. Just make it a sequence.

  As described above, the main control board MS drives the front screen mechanism E1 on condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position, and the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position. Since the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven under this condition, it is possible to prevent interference when the screen mechanisms rotate.

(Origin return operation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, the origin returning operation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. The origin return operation is executed at a predetermined timing such as when the power is cut off.

  Here, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is driven from the origin position by the drive motor E25 in the + direction by several steps (see FIG. 68). Therefore, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 may not coincide with the origin position. Similarly, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 may not coincide with the origin position. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is the Hi signal, the origin return operation related to the front screen mechanism E1 is performed, and even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is the Hi signal, the reel screen mechanism F1 is operated. The origin return operation is performed.

  Further, the main control board MS drives the drive motor F24 and the drive motor E25 in the origin return operation, and is capable of executing four types of basic operations of operations 1 to 4. Operations 1 and 2 are operations related to the front screen mechanism E1, and operations 3 and 4 are operations related to the reel screen mechanism F1.

  Operation 1 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is the Hi signal. Specifically, the operation 1 is an operation of driving the drive motor E25 in the + direction by about 30 to 40 steps. As a result, the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

  Operation 2 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is the Low signal. More specifically, the operation 2 is an operation of driving the drive motor E25 in the − direction and driving and stopping for 20 steps after the signal output from the sensor CS1 is switched from the Low signal to the Hi signal. As mentioned earlier, when the front standby position is the origin position and the number of steps of the drive motor E25 is 20-21, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing this operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 can be reliably returned to the origin position.

  Operation 3 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal. Specifically, it is an operation of driving the drive motor F24 in the + direction by about 10 to 20 steps. As a result, the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

  Operation 4 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is the Low signal. Specifically, the operation 4 is an operation in which the drive motor F24 is driven in the − direction, and after the signal output from the sensor CS3 is switched from the Low signal to the Hi signal, it is driven for one step and stopped. As mentioned earlier, when the reel standby position is set to the origin position and the number of steps of the drive motor F24 is 1-2, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing this operation 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the origin position.

  As shown in FIG. 72, since the sensor mechanism CS has three sensors CS1 to CS3, there are a total of eight combinations of detection states of these sensors CS1 to CS3. Here, since the front screen mechanism E1 is not arranged at the front standby position and the front exposure position at the same time, of these eight types of sensor states, the two types in which the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 both output the Hi signal are used. In the sensor states (state 1 and state 2), an abnormality such as a failure of the sensors CS1 and CS2 has occurred. Therefore, when the sensors CS1 and CS2 both output the Hi signal, the main control board MS determines that an abnormality has occurred, and notifies the abnormality by voice or video through a speaker, a monitor, or the like.

  In the memory of the main control board MS, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen corresponding to the six sensor states (states 3 to 8) of the eight sensor states of the sensor mechanism CS excluding the above two sensor states. Six types of driving procedures for the mechanism F1 are stored. The six types of driving procedures are determined so that the screen mechanisms do not interfere with each other as much as possible. Hereinafter, the driving procedure for each of the six sensor states will be described.

  In the sensor state (state 3) in which the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS3 output a Hi signal and the sensor CS2 outputs a Low signal, both the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are outside the operating range of the other screen mechanism. It is located in. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 3, the main control board MS first performs the operations 1 and 2 successively to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. After that, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 3 and the operation 4.

  In the sensor state (state 4) in which the sensor CS1 outputs a Hi signal and the sensors CS2 and CS3 output a Low signal, the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged outside the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. The screen mechanism is arranged at the reel exposure position or at an intermediate position between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. Here, the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1 is the range on the reel standby position side (non-overlapping range) when it is outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel exposure position side when it is within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. It is divided into two ranges, a range (overlapping range). The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. Therefore, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the intermediate position, there is a possibility that the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged in the overlapping range which is within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 4, the main control substrate MS first performs the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the operation 1 and the operation 2 are continuously performed to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position.

  In the sensor state (state 5) in which the sensor CS2 and the sensor CS3 output the Hi signal and the sensor CS1 outputs the Low signal, the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and The reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 5, the main control substrate MS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. After that, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 3 and the operation 4.

  In the sensor state (state 6) in which the sensor CS2 outputs the Hi signal and the sensors CS1 and CS3 output the Low signal, the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposure position and the reel screen mechanism F1. Are located in an intermediate position. In this state 6, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be arranged within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 as in the case of the above-mentioned state 4. Therefore, in the drive procedure according to the state 6, the main control substrate MS first performs the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. After that, by performing the operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the origin position.

  In the sensor state (state 7) in which the sensor CS3 outputs a Hi signal and the sensors CS1 and CS2 output a Low signal, the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the intermediate position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is It is arranged outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 7, the main control board MS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. After that, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 3 and the operation 4.

  In the sensor state (state 8) in which the sensors CS1 to CS3 output Low signals, the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the intermediate position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the intermediate position or the reel exposed position. Here, as for the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1, when the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1 is outside the operating range of the front standby position (non-overlapping range), the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the front exposure position side. And a range (overlapping range). The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the front exposure position and the front standby position. Therefore, in the state 8, the front screen mechanism E1 may be located within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. Therefore, there is a possibility that the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are arranged within their respective operating ranges. As a result, when one of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven, the other screen mechanism may move due to interference. Therefore, when the return operation is performed by driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 based only on the detection results of the sensors CS1 to CS3 at the time of starting the return operation, one of the screen mechanisms is returned to the origin position. It may not be possible.

  Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 8, the main control board MS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. After that, the main control board MS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal or a Low signal. Then, when the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is the Low signal, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by performing the operation 4. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is the Hi signal, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 3 and 4.

  As described above, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is in the states 3 to 7, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven according to the driving procedure corresponding to each state, so that the screen mechanisms interfere with each other. Instead, they can be returned to their respective origin positions. Further, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is the state 8, after the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the original position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the original position by the driving procedure according to the detection signal of the sensor CS3. Each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the origin position. As a result, by appropriately driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 in the processing after the return operation, it is possible to reliably prevent the screen mechanisms from interfering with each other.

  As a modified example, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is the state 3, the main control board MS continuously performs the actions 3 and 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position, and then the action 1 The front screen mechanism E1 may be returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 2 and the operation 2.

  Further, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is state 8, the main control board MS first performs the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. After that, the main control board MS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal or a Low signal. Then, when the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is the Low signal, the operation 2 is performed to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is the Hi signal, the front screen mechanism E1 may be returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 1 and 2.

  Further, the sensors CS1 to CS3 are not limited to the transmission type optical sensor, and various sensors such as a contact type sensor can be adopted. Further, the sensor mechanism CS does not necessarily have to have the three sensors CS1 to CS3, and detects whether the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or not, and the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front exposure position. One sensor may be used as long as it is possible to detect whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 is present at the reel standby position.

(Cabinet G)

(Cabinet G: medal supply mechanism MH)
As shown in FIG. 73A, the back wall G3 of the cabinet G is provided with a supply opening G31 for communicating the atmosphere between the inside and the outside of the housing 2. The supply opening G31 is arranged at the center of the back wall G3. When an automatic circulation replenishing device (not shown) is laid on the installation island where the gaming machine 1 is installed, the screw is inserted with the medal replenishment port P, which is the replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishing device, inserted into the replenishment opening G31. It is stopped and fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 73B, the medal supply port P inserted through the supply opening G31 reaches above the hopper mechanism HP. Thereby, the medals from the automatic circulation supply device can be supplied to the hopper mechanism HP.

  As shown in FIG. 73B, a medal replenishment mechanism MH is provided inside the housing 2 in the replenishment opening G31 through which the medal replenishment port P is inserted. The medal supply mechanism MH opens and closes the supply opening G31. That is, when the medal supply port P of the automatic circulation replenishing device is inserted through the supply opening G31, the supply opening G31 is opened by the medal supply mechanism MH. Further, when the medal replenishment port P of the automatic circulation replenishing device is not inserted into the replenishment opening G31, the replenishment opening G31 is closed by the medal replenishment mechanism MH. Hereinafter, the medal supply mechanism MH will be specifically described.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the medal supply mechanism MH has a shield member MH1 and a guide member MH2. The shield member MH1 is slidable in the vertical direction by the guide member MH2, and can switch between a shielded state in which the supply opening G31 is shielded and a released state in which the supply opening G31 is exposed. ..

  The shield member MH1 has a flat plate portion MH11 and a protruding portion MH12. The flat plate portion MH11 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that can shield the supply opening G31 from the inside of the cabinet G of the housing 2. The flat plate portion MH11 has a screw hole MH13 in the upper portion and a screw hole MH14 in the lower portion. As a result, the shield member MH1 can be screwed and fixed to the rear wall G3 in a shielded state in which the supply opening G31 is shielded. The protruding portion MH12 is formed so as to vertically protrude from the center of the upper edge of the flat plate portion MH11 toward the inside of the cabinet G.

  The guide member MH2 is formed in a rectangular ring shape along the edge of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state that shields the supply opening G31. The guide member MH2 is screwed and fixed to the back wall G3 so as to sandwich the shielding member MH1. Specifically, the guide member MH2 has an upper edge portion MH21, two side edge portions MH22 and MH22, and a lower edge portion MH23.

  The upper edge portion MH21 is formed along the outer side of the upper edge of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state. That is, the upper edge portion MH21 is adjacent to the upper side of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state and regulates the movement of the shielding member MH1 in the vertically upward direction. The two side edge portions MH22 and MH22 are formed along the side edges of the shielding member MH1 in a state of being shielded vertically downward from both ends of the upper edge portion MH21, respectively. That is, the two side edge portions MH22 and MH22 are adjacent to the side of the shielding member MH1 in the shielded state and regulate the movement of the shielding member MH1 to the side.

  The lower edge portion 23 is formed so as to connect the other ends of the two side edge portions MH22 and MH22. The lower edge portion 23 has a holding portion MH23a, a guide groove MH23b, and a screw hole MH23c. The holding portion MH23a is a notch formed in the center of the upper surface of the lower edge portion 23, and has a width larger than the width of the protruding portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1. Accordingly, when the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state is slid vertically downward, the protruding portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 is supported by the holding portion MH23a. That is, the shielding member MH1 is held in the open state exposing the supply opening G31. Further, the holding portion MH23a is formed to be thinner than the protruding length of the protruding portion MH12. Therefore, since the protruding portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 protrudes more than the holding portion MH23a, the protruding portion MH12 can be easily grasped, and the open state can be easily transitioned to the shielded state.

  The guide groove MH23b is a groove that engages with the shield member MH1 formed on the rear wall G3 side, and the shield member MH1 is slid in the vertical direction. The screw hole MH23c is formed at a position where the screw hole MH14 can be screwed and fixed to the screw hole MH14 in the shielded state and can be screwed to and fixed to the screw hole MH13 when the screw hole is MH23c is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the medal supply port P is obliquely inserted into the supply opening G31. A scaler device SK is arranged above the medal supply port P. The scaler device SK has a scaler substrate SK1 that processes position information input to the touch sensor panel arranged on the liquid crystal display panel surface, and a scaler substrate case SK2 in which the scaler substrate SK1 is installed. The scaler substrate case SK2 is a support member whose bottom surface is a concave plate formed so as to surround the medal supply port P that is inclined in an oblique direction. The scaler substrate SK1 is provided obliquely on such a scaler substrate case SK2.

(Hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 77, below the lower space of the cabinet G, a hopper mechanism HP and an overflow bucket OF are arranged.

  The hopper mechanism HP is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate G91 in the cabinet G. The hopper mechanism HP has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and discharging them one by one. The hopper mechanism HP pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number or when the settlement button is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper mechanism HP are discharged from the medal payout opening DD14.

  The overflow bucket OF stores the medals overflowing from the hopper mechanism HP. The overflow bucket OF is arranged on the right side of the hopper mechanism HP when the inside of the cabinet G is viewed from the front. The overflow bucket OF is engaged with the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G and is configured to be detachable from the bottom plate G91.

(Structure of hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 78, the hopper mechanism HP includes a bucket HP1 for storing a large number of medals, a base member HP2 to which the bucket HP1 is attached, and a payout unit (not shown) housed inside the base member HP2. There is.

  The payout unit has a function of paying out medals one by one in a fixed posture, and has a coin disk for sequentially paying out medals accumulated in the bucket HP1 while rotating them. The base member HP2 has a medal payout opening DD14. By driving the coin disks of the medal payout unit accumulated in the bucket HP1, the coin disks are ejected one by one from the medal payout opening DD14.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the bucket HP1 has an upper end opening HP11 formed from a wall surface that is substantially perpendicular to the horizontal plane, and an inclined side wall part HP12 that is continuous with the upper end opening HP11 and inclines at a predetermined angle. is doing. The upper end opening HP11 is formed in a substantially rectangular plane shape. A discharge guide HP13 that guides the medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 to the outside of the bucket HP1 is provided at a corner before the upper end opening HP11. The discharge guide HP13 has an inclined surface that is inclined so as to become lower from the inside of the bucket HP1 toward the outside thereof. The medals guided by the ejection guide HP13 are stored in the overflow bucket OF.

  The medals guided by the selector DD15 and colliding with the ejection guide HP13 bounce toward the inclined side wall portion HP12 of the bucket HP1. At this time, if the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 has not reached a certain amount, the medals move in the bucket HP1 along the inclined side wall portion HP12. Thereby, the medals can be uniformly stored in the bucket HP1.

  On the other hand, when the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 reaches a certain amount, the medals collide with the inclined surface of the ejection guide HP13 and bounce, and collide with the medals stored in the bucket HP1 to eject guide HP13. Return to the slope of. Then, the medal moves on the inclined surface of the discharge guide HP13 by its own weight and moves toward the overflow bucket OF side.

  Further, guide pieces HP21 and HP22 that are continuously projected from the bottom surface of the hopper mechanism HP are provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP. Further, on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP, a connector HP41 connected to a connector G81 of the cabinet G described later is provided.

(Structure of overflow bucket OF)
As shown in FIG. 78, the overflow bucket OF includes a storage case body OF1 and a medal guide OF2.

  The storage case body OF1 is formed in a rectangular box shape having an open top surface. The medal guide OF2 is configured to be attachable to and detachable from the storage case body OF1. The medal guide OF2 guides the medal guided from the discharge guide HP13 to the overflow bucket OF to the storage case main body OF1 and prevents the medal from being biased to one side surface side of the storage case main body OF1.

(Coin Guard HP30)
In this gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 79, above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, a medal replenishing mechanism MH (corresponding to a replenishing port) for ejecting medals received from the outside is provided.

  Here, there is a predetermined distance in the height direction between the medal supply mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to a hopper device). When the medals are supplied from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP, there is a predetermined distance in the height direction, so the medals fall and collide with the medals stored in the bucket HP1. It may be played. In this case, most of them collide with the upper end opening HP11 of the hopper mechanism HP and stay in the bucket HP1. However, in rare cases, the medal may jump over the upper end opening HP11 and jump out of the bucket HP1.

When the medal jumps out of the bucket HP1, or when the medal falls on the side of the bottom plate G91 where the power supply device DE is located or the side where the overflow bucket OF is located, the lower door mechanism DD is opened and collected. do it. However, when the medal falls between the hopper mechanism HP and the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, it is necessary to remove the hopper mechanism HP, which requires a lot of labor.
Further, since the connector is electrically connected between the hopper mechanism HP and the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, when a metal medal touches a metal part of the connector, it may cause a failure. Will end up.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, between the medal supply mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, the back wall G3 of the cabinet G (corresponding to the back surface of the housing) and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP are provided. A coin guard HP30 (corresponding to a medal spill prevention member) is provided so as to bridge the gap HPG (see FIG. 80) between the coin guard HP and the edge of the bucket HP1 from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 and 81, the coin guard HP30 is provided at a corner portion on the far side of the upper end opening HP11 and has an L shape in a top view. The L-shaped coin guard HP30 includes a first guard portion HP301 facing the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and a second guard portion HP302 facing the overflow bucket OF. In this way, the first guard portion HP301 prevents medals from falling in the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, and the second guard portion HP302 is the overflow bucket. This prevents medals from falling on the OF (equivalent to auxiliary storage) side.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the first guard portion HP301 and the second guard portion HP302 of the coin guard HP30 are inclined from the rear wall G3 side of the cabinet G toward the bucket HP1 side. It has a surface HP301a. Further, as shown in FIG. 81, two screw holes HP301c and HP301d that are screwed into the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are formed on the front surface of the coin guard HP30.

  According to the above configuration, since the coin guard HP30 is provided so as to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, the medals received from the medal supply mechanism MH are Even if it is about to overflow from HP1, it can be prevented from entering the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overflowed medals from being accumulated in the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfering with the connector, the electronic device, or the movable member.

  Further, by making the coin guard HP30 L-shaped, the second guard portion HP302 can be arranged between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1. This can prevent medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the hopper mechanism HP.

  Further, the coin guard HP30 has inclined surfaces HP301a and HP301b. As a result, even if a medal is placed on the coin guard HP30, the medal is inclined toward the bucket HP1 side, so that the medal slides down toward the bucket HP1 side due to its own weight, and the medal can be normally stored in the hopper mechanism HP. it can.

(Hopper guide mechanism HG)
The substrate HG1 that constitutes the hopper guide mechanism HG is positioned by a screw in the center of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83. As shown in FIG. 84, the board HG1 is a frame body having an opening HG11 at the center, and guide rails HG12 and HG13 are formed by bending both sides of the board HG1 in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 83, on the front side of the board HG1, a lock member HG14 that is locked to a locking member (not shown) provided at the bottom of the hopper mechanism HP is fixed with a screw, and the board HG1 is fixed. A connector G81 (corresponding to a housing side connector) on the cabinet G side is arranged in the back.

  The guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP are guided to the guide rails HG12 and HG13, so that the connector HP41 (see FIG. 85) provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to the connector G81 (connector on the hopper side). Equivalent to) is connected.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the guide rails HG12 and HG13 are formed in a U-shape by the lower portions HG123 and HG133, the side surfaces HG122 and HG132, and the upper portions HG121 and HG131. Further, projecting portions HG124 and HG134 projecting in the vertical direction are formed above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. The protrusions HG124 and HG134, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, the side surfaces HG122 and HG132, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, and the substrate HG1 are integrally formed by bending a single plate.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the upper portions HG121 and HG131 have a tapered portion on the front side.

  The protrusions HG124 and HG134 are formed in the upper portions HG121 and HG131 so as to be arranged in front of the connector G81 on the cabinet G side. Further, the protrusions HG124 and HG134 have a shorter length in the depth direction than the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and are arranged on the inner side of the upper portions HG121 and HG131.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 84, pedestal plates HG151, HG152, HG153, which are in contact with the bottom plate G91 and serve as pedestals for the connector G81, are formed on the back surface of the substrate HG1. The base plates HG151, HG152, HG153 are also formed by being integrally bent with the substrate HG1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 84, a planar space HG17 is provided on the front side of the substrate HG1 (front side of the guide rails HG12 and HG13).

  As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on the side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP are respectively provided between the lower portions HG123 and HG133 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and the upper portions HG121 and HG131. The connector HP41 provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to the connector G81 by being slid to the inner side of the cabinet G in a state of being sandwiched by and engaged with.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, for example, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on the side surface of the hopper mechanism HP are provided between the lower portions HG123 and HG133 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and the upper portions HG121 and HG131. If the hopper mechanism HP is slid to the back side of the cabinet G as it is, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 come into contact with the protrusions HG124 and HG134, The hopper mechanism HP is restricted from sliding inward of the protrusions HG124 and HG134. Further, the hopper mechanism HP in a state where the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are in contact with the projecting portions HG124 and HG134 is, as shown in FIG. 88, the back surface of the lower door mechanism DD when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (see FIG. 88). (See the two-dot chain line DDB in FIG. 2) is projected, and if the lower door mechanism DD is closed, it contacts the hopper mechanism HP.

According to the above configuration, in order to electrically connect the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP to the connector G81 on the cabinet G side, when the hopper mechanism HP is slid on the hopper guide mechanism HG, both sides of the hopper mechanism HP are installed. When the pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided are not engaged with the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and are accidentally slid and slid above the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the rails HG12 and HG13 and on the front side of the connector G81, the hopper mechanism HP is slid at an incorrect position and the connector G81 comes into contact with the hopper mechanism HP. Can be prevented. That is, it becomes possible to normally slide the hopper mechanism HP inside the cabinet G.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from slidingly installed at the wrong position, the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP contacting the connector G81 at the wrong position, and the connector G81 and the connector HP41 from being damaged.

  Further, when the hopper mechanism HP is slid on the bottom of the cabinet G, the pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP are provided with upper and lower portions HG121 and HG131 and lower portions of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. When it is not sandwiched between the HG123 and HG133 and is accidentally displaced and slid above the upper part HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are placed above the guide rails HG12 and HG13. By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the parts HG121 and HG131, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid at the wrong position. That is, it becomes possible to normally slide the hopper mechanism HP inside the cabinet G.

  Moreover, since a part of the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 are tapered, when guiding the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the upper portions HG121 and HG13 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 are guided. It is possible to prevent the HG 131 from coming into contact with the hopper mechanism HP.

  In addition, the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13, the lower portion HG123 and HG133, the upper portion HG121 and HG131, and the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 are formed by a single plate, so that the manufacturing process can be simplified. ..

  Further, since the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 are located on the back side of the cabinet G, they do not interfere when temporarily placing the hopper mechanism HP around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparatory step for guiding the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13. You can

  Further, as a preparatory step before guiding the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13 in the planar space HG17 provided in front of the substrate HG1 (in front of the guide rails HG12 and HG13), The hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed. Accordingly, the hopper mechanism HP can be slidably installed on the hopper guide mechanism HG.

(Sheet metal BK)
As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a display unit A (corresponding to an effect device) is provided in an upper space (corresponding to the upper part of the housing) of a cabinet G (corresponding to the housing). Further, a power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to a hopper device) are provided at the bottom of a lower space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the lower part of the casing), and the rear side of the power supply device DE and the hopper mechanism HP (the cabinet). A sub-control device SS (corresponding to control means) is provided on the rear wall G3 side of G). That is, the hopper mechanism HP is arranged on the front side of the sub control device SS. A sheet metal BK is installed between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub control device SS. A sub relay device SN is provided between the sub control device SS and the intermediate support plate G1. Above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, a medal replenishment mechanism MH (corresponding to a replenishment port) for replenishing metal medals from the outside is provided, and medals are dropped from the medal replenishment mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP. To be done.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the sheet metal BK is arranged above the corner portion on the left hand side of the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. The sheet metal BK is disposed between the first facing surface BK1 facing the sub control device SS, the second facing surface BK2 facing the power supply device DE, the bottom face of the sub control device SS and the top face of the bucket HP1. A third facing surface BK3, a supporting surface BK4 protruding from the third facing surface BK3, and fixing the sheet metal BK to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G with screws, a fourth facing surface BK7 corresponding to the medal supply mechanism MH, and the sheet metal BK. And a support surface BK7 for fixing to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G with screws. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the sheet metal BK is formed by bending a single plate, and has a rectangular third facing surface BK3 that contacts the bottom surface of the sub control device SS, and a third facing surface BK3. The rectangular support surface BK4 bent downward by 90 ° toward the back wall G3 side of the third facing surface BK3, and the rectangular support surface BK5 bent downward by 90 ° toward the power supply device DE side of the third facing surface BK3. , The first facing surface BK1 having a quadrangular shape that is bent upward by 90 ° on the front side of the third facing surface BK3 (a rectangular cutout BK12 is formed in the upper right of the front view), the first facing surface BK1 The second opposing surface BK2, which has a quadrangular shape that is bent toward the front side by 90 ° to the power supply device DE, and the fourth opposing surface, which has a quadrangular shape that is bent toward the back wall G3 side, by the medal supply mechanism MH of the first opposing surface BK1. BK6, of the fourth facing surface BK6 A rectangular support surface BK7 is formed on the back wall G3 by bending 90 ° toward the medal supply mechanism MH. The sheet metal BK is screwed into the corresponding back wall G3 via the screw holes BK41 formed in the support surface BK4 and the screw holes BK71 formed in the support surface BK7. As a result, the sub control device SS is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the first facing surface BK1 of the sheet metal BK. The sheet metal BK may be made of metal and may be fixed to the back wall G3, which is also made of metal, via the support surface BK4.

  In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub control device SS. That is, the support surface BK4 and the first facing surface BK1 are not in contact with the sub control device SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub control device SS. Further, the thin plate-like sub relay device SN detachably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and the thin plate-like sub control device SS detachably attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are viewed from the side. It is arranged so that the L shape is upside down.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub-control device SS side, the sheet metal BK is used. It is possible to prevent the medal from physically contacting the sub control device SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the sheet metal BK can also prevent the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP.
Further, since the sub-control device SS is provided on the inner side of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched between the back wall G3 and the sheet metal BK, the sub-control device SS is removed from the cabinet G unless the sheet metal BK is removed. I can't remove it. This improves the security of the sub control device SS.

  Further, since the medal is dropped from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP, the medal is frequently flipped in the hopper mechanism HP, and the flip distance is large, but the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP are separated. Since the sheet metal BK is provided between them, even if the medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and largely jumps out to the sub control device SS side, the medal physically contacts the sub control device SS by the sheet metal BK. Can be prevented. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the sheet metal BK can also prevent the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals caused by dropping medals.

(Lower door mechanism DD)
(Lower door lock mechanism and upper door lock mechanism)
As shown in FIG. 93, a lower door lock mechanism G51 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the lower door mechanism DD (corresponding to the lower door). Further, an upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to the upper door). The lower door lock mechanism G51 plays a role in locking the cabinet G so as to maintain a closed state in a lower space (corresponding to a lower portion of the housing) of the cabinet G. Further, the upper door lock mechanism G52 plays a role of locking so as to maintain a closed state of the upper space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the upper portion of the housing).

(Lower door lock mechanism G51)
As shown in FIG. 94, the lower door locking mechanism G51 includes a locked portion G511 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the lower door mechanism DD, a locking portion G512 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G, and It has a cylinder lock G513.

  The locked portion G511 includes two locked rods G511a and G511b, which are rod-shaped and are formed over both ends of a frame G511c having a concave shape, in an upper portion and a lower portion.

  The locking portion G512 includes a long cylinder G5122 and a long locking plate G5121 that is slidably arranged in the cylinder G5122 in the vertical direction.

  The locking plate G5121 has claw-shaped claw portions G5121a and G5121b that are locked to the locked bars G511a and G511b. The claws G5121a and G5121b slide vertically in the cylinder G5122 as the locking plate G5121 slides, and thus the locked rods inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the cylinder G5122. It is locked or released from G511a and G511b. The locking plate G5121 has a spring that is biased upward.

  The claws G5121a and G5121b are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b when the locking plate G5121 is at a height position where the locking plate G5121 locks the lower door mechanism DD, while the locking plate G5121 is locked to the lower door mechanism DD. The lock with respect to the locked rods G511a and G511b is set to be released when the lock bar is lowered from the lock position to the lock position. Further, the claw portions G5121a and G5121b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G511a and G511b.

  Although not shown, the locking portion G512 has a pull-down portion in the middle portion. The pulling-down portion allows the locking plate G5121 to be pulled down as the key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and rotated. As a result, by lowering the locking plate G5121 as it is lowered, the locking between the claw portions G5121a / G5121b and the locked rods G511a / G511b can be released.

(Upper door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 94, the upper door lock mechanism G52 includes a locked portion G521 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locking portion G522 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G. Have

  The locked portion G521 has two rod-shaped locked rods G521a and G521b formed on both ends of a concave frame G521c at the upper and lower portions.

  The locking portion G522 has a long cylinder G5222 (corresponding to a locking cylinder) and a long locking plate G5221 (corresponding to a locking member) slidably arranged in the cylinder G5222 in the vertical direction. is doing.

  The locking plate G5221 has claw-shaped claw parts G5221a and G5221b (corresponding to the locking part) that are claw-shaped to be locked to the locked bars G521a and G521b. The claws G5221a and G5221b slide vertically in the cylinder G5222 as the locking plate G5221 slides, and thus the locked rods inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the cylinder G5222. It is locked or released from G521a and G521b (see FIG. 97).

  The claws G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b when the locking plate G5221 is at the height position where the locking plate G5221 is locked, while the locking plate G5221 is locked to the upper door mechanism DU. It is set so that the locking of the locked rods G521a and G521b is released when the lock bar is lowered from the locking height position to the unlocking height position. Further, as shown in FIG. 96, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G521a and G521b.

  As shown in FIG. 95, an opening G5222c is formed below the upper door mechanism DU in the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522, and the protrusion G5221c is provided on the locking plate G5221 so that the opening G5222c is closed. It protrudes to the inside of the cabinet G through. By pulling down the protrusion G5221c, the locking plate G5221 is lowered, and the locking between the claws G5221a / G5221b and the locked rods G521a / G521b can be released accordingly.

  Here, when the protrusion G5221c is slid upward and the locking plate G5221 is in the height position where the locking plate G5221 locks the upper door mechanism DU, the protrusion G5221c causes the upper portion DDU of the lower door mechanism DD (see FIG. 93). ) Is arranged to abut.

  According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper plate DDU of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the protrusion G5221c to prevent the locking plate G5221 from sliding, and The locking between the parts G5221a / G5221b and the locked rods G521a / G521b can be prevented from being released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be locked so that it cannot be opened.

  On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open, the physical interference with the protrusion G5221c of the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the locking plate G5221 can slide in the tube G5222, and The locking of the locked portions G521a and G521b of the parts G5221a and G5221b is released, and the locking of the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU can be released.

  Accordingly, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to first perform a procedure for unlocking the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to unlock the lower door lock mechanism G51, unlock the lower door mechanism DD, and then unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52. Security can be increased. Further, the upper space of the cabinet G can be made more secure than the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space of the cabinet G. Can be in place.

  Further, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the administrator of the gaming machine 1, the key has a merit that it is easy to manage because it is compact and suitable for carrying.

  Further, the sliding of the locking plate G5221 causes the claw portions G5221a and G5221b to be caught or released by the locked rods G521a and G521b. Accordingly, it is possible to lock the upper space of the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU, which is interlocked with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

  Further, since the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the end opposite to the pivotally supported end and is arranged on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD widely. As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is unnecessary to expose the lower space of the cabinet G to the outside, and security can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a one-way hinge DD54 is applied between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G to apply a predetermined torque in the closing direction of the lower door mechanism DD. As a result, torque is applied when closing the lower door mechanism DD, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the cabinet G without applying a sudden load. As a result, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the protruding portion B131 that physically interferes with the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between power supply device DE and speaker DD25L)
As shown in FIG. 99, a speaker DD25L (corresponding to an audio device) is provided on the lower portion of the rear side of the lower door DD1 (corresponding to a door) of the lower door mechanism DD (the lower space side of the cabinet G (corresponding to a casing)). Is provided. On the other hand, a power supply device DE (corresponding to a power supply device) is provided in the lower space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the inside of the housing). The speaker DD25L and the power supply device DE are arranged to face each other when the lower door mechanism DD is closed with respect to the cabinet G (see FIG. 101).

  The power supply device DE is arranged on the left side of the hopper mechanism HP when the inside of the cabinet G is viewed from the front. The power supply device DE plays a role of converting the power of the AC voltage supplied from the outside into the power of the DC voltage required in each unit, and supplying the converted power to each device constituting the gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 100, on the front side of the power supply device DE, a power switch DE1 is provided which switches whether to supply power to the devices constituting the gaming machine 1 (ON / OFF). Further, two slide rails DE3 are provided in the vertical direction on both sides of the power switch DE1. The switch cover DE2 is slidable in the vertical direction on the slide rail DE3. As a result, when the switch cover DE2 is slid (slide) downward along the slide rail DE3, the switch cover DE2 covers the power switch DE1 as shown in FIG. 99 (the switch cover DE2 is closed). On the other hand, when the switch cover DE2 is slid (slide) upward along the slide rail DE3, the power switch DE1 is exposed (the open state of the switch cover DE2) as shown in FIG. By providing the switch cover DE2 in this manner, it is possible to prevent the power switch DE1 from being directly accessed from the outside, thereby improving security.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the switch cover DE2 has an inclined surface DE2a inclined so as to project downward from above.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101, a convex portion DD25L1 (corresponding to an engaging portion) protruding toward the power supply device DE side is formed on the back surface side of the speaker DD25L (the surface side facing the power supply device DE). The convex portion DD25L1 has an inclined surface DD25La that is inclined so as to project upward from below.

  In the speaker DD25L, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed with respect to the cabinet G, the convex portion DD25L1 interrupts above the switch cover DE2 (sliding path) when the switch cover DE2 is closed, and switches The cover DE2 is formed at a position that restricts sliding upward.

According to the above configuration, by closing the lower door mechanism DD, the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back surface of the lower door DD1 interrupts the sliding path (moving path) of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is opened. It is possible to regulate the opening state. On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back surface of the lower door DD1 is released, so the switch cover DE2 is slid upward and the power switch It becomes possible to switch from the closed state where the operation of the DE1 is impossible to the open state where the power switch DE1 can be operated.
As a result, operability of the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD opened can be ensured, and unauthorized operation on the power supply device DE can be prevented to improve security.

  Further, by sliding the switch cover DE2 up and down, it is possible to switch between the open state and the closed state. This makes it easy to access the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD open.

  Further, since the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the speaker DD25L has a convex shape, the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased by the amount of the protrusion to the power supply device DE side, and the sound quality can be improved at the same time. ..

Further, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are arranged at positions facing each other, and the switch cover DE2 slides. Movement can be regulated.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is located at a position displaced upward from the closed state, so that the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is switched to the switch position. Since the cover DE2 comes into contact with the inclined surface DE2a and is pushed in, the switch cover DE2 slides downward and moves to the closed position.
As a result, even if the switch cover DE2 is forgotten to be closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed in the open state, the sloped surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 becomes the sloped surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2. Since it abuts and pushes in, the switch cover DE2 can be slid and moved to the closed position in conjunction with the operation of closing the lower door mechanism DD.

(Maximum BET button DD8)
The maximum BET button DD8 (corresponding to a button unit) is arranged on the second pedestal portion DD2b (corresponding to a pedestal portion). As shown in FIG. 102, an opening DD2ba is formed in the second pedestal DD2b. As shown in FIG. 105, the opening DD2ba has a predetermined depth, has a side wall DD2bc so as to surround the opening DD2ba, and a flange DD2bb is formed at the bottom of the side wall DD2bc. As shown in FIG. 102, the maximum BET button DD8 is composed of an operation unit DD81 and a locking unit DD82.

(Operation unit DD81)
As shown in FIG. 106, the operation unit DD81 includes a first member DD812, a button base DD811, a spring DD813 (corresponding to an elastic member), a photo sensor DD814, a second member DD815, and a button base cover DD816. Have

  The first member DD812 includes a button base portion DD8123, a button cover portion DD8121, and a button sheet DD8122. As shown in FIG. 106, the first member DD812 is arranged so that it can be pushed downward (direction A).

  The button cover portion DD8121 is arranged above the button base portion DD8123. The button cover portion DD8121 is engaged and fixed to the edge of the button base portion DD8123. The button cover portion DD8121 has a function as a cover that constitutes a surface directly pressed by the player.

  The button sheet DD8122 is arranged between the button base portion DD8123 and the button cover portion DD8121. The button sheet DD8122 is made of a light-transmitting resin sheet having a flat plate shape and has a light distribution property.

  The button base DD8123 is arranged above the button base DD811. The button base DD8123 has two cylindrical sliding parts DD8124a and DD8124b on the lower side. A cylindrical screw hole is formed below the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. A spring holding portion DD8124c that holds the spring DD813 is formed between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. The spring holding portion DD8124c is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter dimension as the spring DD813.

  A spring DD813 having an elastic force that repels a force that pushes down the first member DD812 downward (direction A) is provided between the button base DD8123 and the button base DD811. The spring DD813 is formed by a coil spring formed in a cylindrical shape. One end of the spring DD813 is arranged and held on the outer circumference of the spring holding portion DD8124c. The other end of the spring DD813 is in contact with the lower portion of the button base DD811. Therefore, the spring DD813 repels the player's downward pushing force (A direction) on the button cover portion DD8121 of the first member DD812.

  The button base DD811 is formed in a rectangular box shape having an open top surface. Two through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed in the lower portion of the button base DD811. The through-holes DD811a and DD811b are opened in the vertical direction, and each of the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b is slidable. Therefore, the outer dimensions of the through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed to be larger than the inner diameter dimensions of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. A flange DD8111 protruding outward is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the button base DD811. The flange DD8111 contacts the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba provided in the second pedestal DD2b (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD8111 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the opening DD2ba, and when the operation unit DD81 is inserted from above the opening DD2ba, the portion including the bottom of the button base DD811 and the four side surfaces is Although passing through the opening DD2ba, the flange DD8111 portion is regulated by coming into contact with the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba.

  Further, the button base DD811 is provided with a stop plate DD8112 that extends in the horizontal direction on a side surface portion DD8113 that extends from the side surface of the button base DD811. Further, the side surface DD8113 has two communication holes DD816a and DD816b formed therein. Note that the shape and area of the bottom surface portion of the button cover portion DD8121 and the shape and area of the upper surface portion of the button base DD811 including the flange DD8111 are the same. That is, the button cover portion DD8121 and the button base DD811 have a shape that vertically overlaps with each other.

  The second member DD815 is arranged below the button base DD811 (direction A). The second member DD815 is provided with cylindrical screw holes DD815a and DD815b. The sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b of the button base portion DD8123 pass through the through holes DD811a and DD811b and the lower sides of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extend from the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. The screw holes formed on the lower side of the and the screw holes DD815a and DD815b formed in the second member DD815 are screwed by the screws DD8152a and DD8152b. As a result, the second member DD815 is in a state of being mounted between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b. The second member DD815 has a larger shape than the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

  Further, in the second member DD815, a thin plate-shaped light-shielding piece DD8151 that projects in the vertical direction is provided between the screw hole DD815a and the screw hole DD815b.

  Below the second member DD815 (direction A), there is provided a photo sensor DD814 in which the light emitting portion DD814a and the light receiving portion DD814b are opposed to each other in the horizontal direction at a predetermined interval. This predetermined interval is set to be larger than the horizontal thickness of the light shielding piece DD8151. A transmission connector is provided on the back surface of the photo sensor DD814 and is connected by an external connector DD85.

  The button base cover DD816 is formed in a box shape in which the lower portion side of the button base DD811 and the side facing the side surface portion DD8113 are open. Claw-shaped locking parts DD8161 and DD8162 are formed above the button base cover DD816, and the claw-shaped locking parts DD8161 and DD8162 are locked parts DD8113a and DD8113b provided on the lower part of the button base DD811. The button base cover DD816 is fixed to the lower portion of the button base DD811 by being locked to. Further, the button base cover DD816 is formed with two screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b.

  When the player presses the first member DD812 downward (direction A), the second member DD815 also moves downward (direction A). When the second member DD815 moves, the light blocking piece DD8151 interrupts between the light emitting portion DD814a and the light receiving portion DD814b, and blocks the light emitted from the light emitting portion DD814a to the light receiving portion DD814b. As a result, it is detected that the player has operated the maximum BET button DD8.

  Then, when the player stops pressing the first member DD812 downward (direction A), the repulsive force of the spring DD813 moves the button base DD8123 upward (the first member DD812 moves to the initial position). Come back). When the button base portion DD8123 moves upward due to the repulsive force of the spring DD813, the upper surface portion of the second member DD815 contacts the lower surface of the stop plate DD8112, and the second member DD815 and the first member DD812 return too upward. Regulate things.

  As a result, when the second member DD815 moves upward, the light-shielding piece DD8151 that is interrupted between the light emitting portion DD814a and the light receiving portion DD814b also moves upward, and the light emitting portion DD814a emits light to the light receiving portion DD814b. The light blocking is released. As a result, it is detected that the player has not operated the maximum BET button DD8.

  According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and the sliding portion DD8124a of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. -It is attached to DD8124b. As a result, the second member DD815 can prevent the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b of the first member DD812 from coming off from the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from being illegally removed.

  In addition, the light blocking piece DD8151 is interlocked with the pressing of the first member DD812 by the player, and the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b slide in the two through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811, and the two through holes. A light-shielding piece DD8151 provided at an intermediate portion of the second member DD815 attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the DD811a and DD811b cuts across the light-emitting portion DD814a and the light-receiving portion DD814b. can do.

(Locking part DD82)
As shown in FIG. 103, the locking portion DD82 has a box shape, and in order to connect the opening DD821 formed on the upper surface of the locking portion DD82 and the connector DD85 to the back surface of the operation portion DD81, It has an opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking portion DD82.

  A flange DD823 protruding outward is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the opening DD821 of the locking portion DD82. Further, the flange DD823 is vertically protruded outside the flange DD823 so as to surround the flange DD823. A surrounding frame DD824 is formed. The flange DD823 abuts on the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD823 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the opening DD2ba, and when the locking portion DD82 is pressed from below the opening DD2ba, the flange DD823 portion contacts the lower surface of the flange DD2bb. It is regulated by contact.

  On the inner wall side of the locking portion DD82, a locking piece DD825 for positioning the operation portion DD81 when the operation portion DD81 is stored is formed. Further, communication holes DD826a and DD826b provided on both sides of the opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking portion DD82 are formed.

  While the operation portion DD81 is inserted into the opening portion DD2ba from above and the flange DD8111 portion is brought into contact with the upper surface of the flange DD2bb, the locking portion DD82 is attached to the operation portion DD81 from below the opening portion DD2ba. The flange DD823 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba. The two screws DD83a and DD83b are respectively screwed into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b through the communication holes DD826a and DD826b and the communication holes DD816a and DD816b (see FIG. 104).

  According to the above configuration, the two screws DD83a and DD83b are respectively engaged with the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b through the communication holes DD826a and DD826b and the communication holes DD816a and DD816b to lock the operation unit DD81. The portion DD82 and the portion DD82 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b through the opening portion DD2ba. Further, since the operation portion DD81 has the flange DD8111 larger than the opening portion DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from falling from the outside of the opening portion DD2ba to the inside of the cabinet G. Further, since the locking portion DD82 also has the flange DD823 larger than the opening portion DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from coming out of the cabinet G from the inside of the opening portion DD2ba. Thereby, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b.

In addition, since the button cover portion DD8121 and the button base DD811 have a shape that vertically overlaps with each other, when the button cover portion DD8121 is viewed from above, the button base DD811 is hidden by the button cover portion DD8121, Only the button cover portion DD8121 pressed by the player can be shown. Thereby, the external appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified and the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be improved in design.
Further, the button cover portion DD8121 has a structure in which the bottom surface of the button base DD811 is smaller than the top surface of the button base DD811, and it is easier to prevent unauthorized entry from the gap between the through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811. be able to.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel device M1)
(Lower door mechanism DD)
As shown in FIG. 107, the lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening in a substantially central portion of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

  The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) each having a plurality of types of symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. These reels RL, RC, RR are arranged in parallel (in one horizontal row) so that they can rotate in the vertical direction at a constant speed. The reels RL, RC, RR allow the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR to be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

  A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, DD2c having substantially horizontal planes are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening through which a player inserts a medal. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

  The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also called a MAXBET button) as an active line setting means for betting credited medals. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of inserted medals.

  A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front surface side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, an electrostatic capacity type panel that detects a part of the human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen and outputs a detection signal thereof, or It may be of a type that detects the contact of a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs the detection signal, or of another type or structure (in-cell structure, etc.).

  The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as an SUI (smart user interface), and displays game information such as the number of games as the game progresses on the display screen, and is selected by the player. Alternatively, a message for requesting input, an input key, or the like is displayed.

  It should be noted that in the liquid crystal display device DD20, it is possible to display, on the display screen thereof, contents (effect information) corresponding to the effect on the game as the game progresses, for example. Further, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a performance accessory, or a dedicated attachment such as a jog dial or a push button may be mounted. Further, the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by allocating its function to the display unit A described later.

  On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, a start lever DD6 for rotating and driving the reels RL, RC, RR by the player's operation and for starting variable display of symbols in the main display window DD4 is provided. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range.

  On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation), respectively. , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

  A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 is for switching the credit / payout of medals that the player has won in the game by pressing a button. When the payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are paid from the medal payout opening DD14 (cancel chute) provided on the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out and paid-out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion DD15.

  A waist panel DD18 (a waist light guide plate) is arranged below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a makeup panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, names representing various models of the gaming machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

  Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout opening DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side thereof. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information related to the game by sound such as voice and music. A first sub display device DD19L and a second sub display device DD19R are arranged on the left and right sides of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of medals to be paid out when the winning is established and the number of remaining medals that have been credited. Normally, since the maximum number of medals credited to the gaming machine 1 is 50, a credit number of 50 or less is displayed. Incidentally, when the maximum number of medals is 50, the inserted medals are paid out from the medal payout opening DD14 as they are. Further, the sub display devices DD19L and DD19R may include a touch panel on the front surface.

(Relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 108, the lower door mechanism DD of the gaming machine 1 is configured to include a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the lower door DD1 (corresponding to a door) is provided so as to be openable / closable with respect to a cabinet G (corresponding to a casing). Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the reel unit RU (corresponding to the symbol display means) is detachably provided on the back side of the lower door DD1 (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)). Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the main control board MS is detachably provided on the rear surface side of the reel unit RU (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)).

  The main control board MS rotates the reels RL, RC, RR of the reel unit RU based on a command signal output from the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R (corresponding to command means). It corresponds to control means for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR by stopping.

  According to the positional relationship among the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated to provide the gaming machine 1 You can easily perform the work when assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling.

  Further, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal, but the main control board MS is difficult to remove because it is integrated with the reel unit RU. Can be configured.

  The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided inside the lower door DD1. As a result, the main control board MS can be arranged on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. For this reason, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if an unauthorized entry is made through the gap of the lower door DD1, it reaches the main control board MS. It becomes difficult to improve the security.

  Further, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when changing the specifications of the gaming machine 1, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, the reel RL of the reel unit RU, The change of the symbols of RC and RR and the change of the game content can be collectively performed.

  Specifically, the attachment of the main control board MS to the reel unit RU will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 111, the reel unit RU has a board contact surface portion RU9a on the rear side. The board contact surface portion RU9a is a flat surface portion that extends in the left-right direction at the center in the up-down direction on the rear surface side of the reel unit RU. The normal direction of the flat surface portion substantially coincides with the front-back direction. Further, the reel unit RU has an upper flat surface portion RU9b above the center right of the board contact surface portion RU9a. The upper flat surface portion RU9b is a flat surface portion whose surface direction matches the board contact surface portion RU9a, and has a screw hole in the upper left portion. Further, the reel unit RU has a mounting portion RU9c below the substrate contact surface portion RU9a whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the substrate contact surface portion RU9a. The mounting portion RU9c includes a wall surface portion whose surface direction matches the board contact surface portion RU9a and the upper flat surface portion RU9b, a bottom surface portion which is bent and extended horizontally backward from a lower portion of the wall surface portion, and a rear portion of the bottom surface portion. And an inclined portion that is bent from the end and extends upward and rearward with an inclination. The mounting unit RU9c has screw holes at both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the reel unit RU has a board contact surface portion RU9a and a flat surface portion whose surface direction coincides with that of the upper flat surface portion RU9b.

  The main control board MS is mounted on the bottom surface of the mounting portion RU9c, and is in surface contact with the board contact surface portion RU9a, the upper flat surface portion RU9b, the wall surface portion of the mounting portion RU9c, and other flat surface portions having the same surface direction. It is positioned in the state where it was set. Then, in this state, through the through hole formed in the main control board MS, the upper planar portion RU9b and the mounting portion RU9c are screwed and screwed together. Accordingly, the main control board MS is stably attached to the board contact surface portion RU9a, the upper flat surface portion RU9b, and the mounting portion RU9c, which are arranged on the same surface.

  Next, specifically, with reference to FIG. 112, attachment of the reel unit RU to the lower door DD1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 112, the reel unit RU has a reel hinge RU21 at the left end. The reel hinge RU21 is a flat plate member having a U-shape in a plan view, and the normal direction of the plane substantially coincides with the front-back direction. The reel hinge RU21 has an upper hinge RU21a formed downward from the upper left end. The reel hinge RU21 has a lower hinge RU21b formed downward from the lower left end. The upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b are formed so that their central axes coincide with each other.

  A reel hinge base DD18 extending from the upper end to the central portion is provided at the upper left portion on the inner side of the lower door DD1. The reel hinge base DD18 has an upper hinge base DDR18a and an upper hinge base DDR18b at positions corresponding to the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b. The upper hinge base DDR18a and the lower hinge base DDR18b are configured such that the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b can be inserted, respectively. In the inserted state, the reel unit RU is centered on the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b. Support rotatably.

The reel unit RU has an upper right lock portion RU22 protruding rightward at the upper right end. Further, the reel unit RU has a lower lock portion RU23 projecting downward from substantially the center of the lower end portion. The upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 can be locked while being in contact with the inner wall surface of the lower door DD1. That is, when the reel unit RU is rotated in the direction of the lower door DD1 and brought into contact with the lower door DD1, the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 are brought into contact with each other while being engaged with the lower door DD1. The upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 are locked to the lower door DD1 so that the reel unit RU can be kept in the unrotatable state. A knob member is rotatably provided on the rear surface side of each of the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23. By rotating the knob member with the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 engaged with the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU can be switched between a rotatable state and a locked state. It has become. The reel unit RU is in the locked state,
The lower door DD1 may be lockable. Further, the main control board MS may be lockable on the reel unit RU.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel unit RU)
As shown in FIG. 113, the reel device RU has three reel units RU1, a reel base RU2, and a reel cover RU3. The three reel units RU1 are arranged side by side (in a horizontal row) in the left-right direction. The left reel unit RU1 has a reel RL, the center reel unit RU1 has a reel RC, and the right reel unit RU1 has a reel RR. Each reel unit RU1 is independently supported by the reel base RU2. The reel base RU2 is formed in a box shape having an open surface, and accommodates each reel unit 1 in a partially exposed state. A reel cover RU3 is attached to the reel base RU2 by screw fastening so as to cover the open surface. With the reel cover RU3 attached to the reel base RU2, the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels RL, RC, and RR of each reel unit RU1 from the central portion to the upper portion are exposed from the reel base RU2. Thereby, the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels RL, RC, RR can be visually recognized.

  Further, the reel unit RU1 has a motor mounting plate RU11 that is a supporting plate that supports a shaft of the reel and that mounts a motor that serves as a driving force of the reel. The motor mounting plate RU11 is arranged on the right side of the reel unit RU1 and rotatably supports the reel. That is, it is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the adjacent reel units RU1. The motor mounting plate RU11 has a front portion RU11a forming a front portion. The front part RU11a is formed in a side view substantially arcuate shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view. The bow shape is a figure surrounded by a circular arc and a string connecting the ends of the circular arc.

  Specifically, the motor mounting plate RU11 includes a front portion RU11a having a substantially arcuate shape in a side view, and a shape continuously formed rearward from both ends of an arc defining the arcuate shape in a side view (for example, a side view). The rear portion RU11b has a substantially rectangular shape. The motor mounting plate RU11 may directly support the reel or may indirectly support the reel via another member.

  The front portion of the motor mounting plate RU11, which is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel when viewed from the side, has substantially the same size as the front portion of the opposing reel, and it is desirable that both of them overlap each other. That is, when viewed from one side surface, the front portion of the motor mounting plate RU11 is substantially completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side surface, the portion of the reel that is opposed to that portion by the front portion of the support plate. Is preferably almost completely covered. As a result, it is possible to achieve a good balance between providing the motor mounting plate RU11 with a function as a partition plate and maintaining the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel unit RU: reel unit RU1)
The reel unit RU1 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the three reel units RU1 have the same configuration, only the right reel unit RU1 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 114, a reel index RU111, a sensor unit RU112, a motor drive unit RU113, and a drive control board RU114 are arranged on the motor mounting plate RU11 of the reel unit RU1. The reel index RU111 is arranged at the center of the motor mounting plate RU11. The sensor unit RU112 is arranged behind the reel index RU111. The motor drive unit RU113 is arranged above the reel index RU111.

  The reel RR has a reel drum RR1. The reel drum RR1 is formed in a tubular shape, and a reel band RR2 on which a plurality of symbols are arranged is wound and fixed. The reel drum RR1 is provided with a frame for increasing rigidity on the surface on the left side of the tubular portion (on the side opposite to the motor mounting plate RU11) in a radial shape from the center and in a concentric circle smaller than the outer peripheral circle. .. This frame has a shape in which the central portion is recessed to the right (inside the tubular shape). A rotary gear RR3 having the same central axis is arranged on the reel drum RR1 on the left side (frame side) inside the tubular shape. That is, inside the reel drum RR1, the reel index RU111, the sensor unit RU112, and the motor drive unit RU113 are arranged on the right side (motor mounting plate RU11) of the rotary gear RR3. The reel drum RR1 is provided with a backlight RR4 for illuminating the symbols arranged on the reels RR stopped and displayed from the back on the radially inner wall surface inside the cylinder.

  The motor drive unit RU113 has a stepping motor and a drive gear that meshes with the rotary gear RR3, and the power from the stepping motor for rotating the reel RR is transmitted by the rotary gear RR3. The stepping motor is rotated by the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU114. That is, it is possible to specify how much the reel RR is rotated from the reference position (the degree of displacement) by the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU114. The motor drive unit RU113 is controlled by the drive control board RU114 to start and stop rotation according to a control signal from the main control board MS. Specifically, a start command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to the player's operation of the start command means such as the start lever DD6. The main control board MS transmits the start control signal to the drive control board RU114 upon the detection of the start command signal. The drive control board RU114 drives the motor drive unit RU113 when the start control signal is detected, and the reel RR is rotated. As a result, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are variably displayed. Further, a stop command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to the operation of the stop command means such as the stop button DD7R by the player. The main control board MS transmits the stop control signal to the drive control board RU114 upon the detection of the stop command signal. The drive control board RU114 drives the motor drive unit RU113 when the stop control signal is detected, and the reel RR is stopped. As a result, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are stopped and displayed.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel device RU: reel unit RU1: reel index RU111)
The reel index RU111 has a reel shaft RU1111, a detection piece RU1112, and a connection plate RU1113. In the reel index RU111, the reel shaft RU1111 is rotatable about the left-right direction as a central axis. The reel shaft RU1111 can be connected and fixed to the rotary shaft of the rotary gear RR3 at the left end, and is rotated with the rotation of the rotary gear RR3. That is, the reel shaft RU1111 is rotated by rotating the reel RR by the motor driving unit RU113. The detection piece RU1112 is formed in a shape of a figure surrounded by an arc-shaped outer periphery and an arc-shaped inner periphery in a side view. In the present embodiment, the angles of the arcs of the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the detection piece RU1112 are set to 180 degrees, respectively, and a circular plate having a concentric opening in the center is cut along a line passing through the center point. ing. A disc-shaped connecting plate RU1113 is connected to the inside of the inner periphery of the detection piece RU1112 along the inner periphery. The connection plate RU1113 is provided with a circular hole at the center, and the reel shaft RU1111 is inserted and fixed. In this way, the reel index RU111 is connected to the rotary gear RR3 via the reel shaft RU1111. Therefore, the reel index RU111 and the rotary gear RR3 are formed as separate members, respectively. In addition, it is preferable to use a material having high slidability for the rotary gear RR3. Further, it is preferable to use a material having an excellent antistatic function for the detection piece RU1112 in the reel index RU111.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 115, the detection piece RU1112 rotates around the rotation axis of the reel shaft RU1111 along with the rotation of the reel shaft RU1111 (reel RR), as indicated by the arrow in the drawing. It is designed to be rotated along. The sensor unit RU112 is arranged on the motor mounting plate RU11 so that the detection point RUP indicated by a star in the drawing on the circumference RUD is the detection position. That is, the sensor unit RU112 detects whether or not the detection piece RU1112 is present at the detection point RUP.

  The relationship between the detection piece RU1112 and the detection state will be described with reference to FIG. In the following, it is assumed that the reel RR continues to rotate. First, in step SRU1, one end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP (on edge), and the detection of the detection piece RU1112 is started by the sensor unit RU112. At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (first reference position) of the reel RR because the detection piece RU1112 has changed from being not detected to being detected. After that, while the detection piece RU1112 continues to exist at the detection point RUP, the state in which the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112 continues (SRU2). Then, the other end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP (off edge), and the detection of the detection piece RU1112 by the sensor unit RU112 ends (SRU3). At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (second reference position) of the reel RR because the detection piece RU1112 has changed from being detected to not being detected. That is, the detection piece RU1112 is continuously detected by the sensor unit RU112 until the position of the reel RR reaches the second reference position after the first reference position. After that, the state in which the detection piece RU1112 is not detected by the sensor unit RU112 continues until one end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP again (SRU4).

  In this way, the first reference position and the second reference position are alternately detected each time the reel RR makes a half turn, and the position of the reel RR is specified based on the detected first reference position or the second reference position. To be done. Specifically, the main control board MS is supplied from the drive control board RU114 to the reference position (first reference position or second reference position) detected immediately before based on the control of the main control board MS. The position of the reel RR is specified by adding a displacement corresponding to the number of drive pulses. As described above, the main control board MS determines the reference position for determining whether or not the reel RR has reached the reference position (the first reference position or the second reference position) based on the detection of the detection piece RU1112 by the sensor unit RU112. Functions as a specifying means. Further, the main control board MS and the drive control board RU114 function as reel position specifying means for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel RR from the reference position (first reference position or second reference position) due to rotation. To do.

  As described above, the detection piece RU1112 is formed in the shape of a figure surrounded by the arc-shaped outer periphery and the arc-shaped inner periphery, and the angle of each arc is set to 180 degrees. Therefore, the first reference position and the second reference position on the reel RR are arranged to face each other on a straight line passing through the central axis of the reel RR with the central axis interposed therebetween.

  In this way, the first reference position of the reel RR is changed by detecting that the state where the detection piece RU1112 is not detected by the sensor unit RU112 is changed to the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112. Can be specified. Further, in this way, by detecting that the detection piece RU1112 is not detected by the sensor portion RU112 from the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor portion RU112, the second reference of the reel RR is detected. The position can be specified. In this way, the reel reference position can be detected twice during one rotation of the reel RR, and the same effect as when two sensors are provided can be obtained.

  It should be noted that, on the circumferential path in which the detection piece rotates, it includes a region from the position corresponding to the first reference position to the position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path, and corresponds to the second reference position. The shape of the detection piece is not limited as long as it has a shape that does not include a region extending from the position along the circumferential path to the position corresponding to the first reference position.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel device RU: reel unit RU1: sensor unit RU112)
As shown in FIG. 117, the left side surface (reel mounting side surface) of the motor mounting plate RU11 is used as the bottom surface, and the sensor unit RU112 is screwed so as to be mounted. The sensor unit RU112 has a sensor RU1121 and a pedestal member RU1122. The sensor RU1121 is a transmissive sensor that detects the detection piece RU1112 that rotates along a predetermined circumference along with the rotation of the reel RR. The sensor RU1121 is formed in a concave shape in a cross section having a hollow center, and is provided so that the hollow direction and the central axis of the reel shaft RU1111 of the reel index RU111 are orthogonal to each other. The sensor RU1121 is attached to the motor attachment plate RU11 via a pedestal member RU1122 so that the edge of the rotation surface of the detection piece RU1112 of the reel index RU111 passes through the space inside the recess of the sensor RU1121.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the pedestal member RU1122 has a pedestal base portion RU1122g having a vertical direction in the vertical direction and a pedestal column portion RU1122h protruding leftward from the center of the pedestal base portion RU1122g. There is. The pedestal base portion RU1122g has a shape in which a semicircle is extended in the vertical direction of a rectangular flat plate. The pedestal base portion RU1122g has screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b penetrating in the left-right direction at upper and lower positions. In addition, the pedestal base portion RU1122g is formed in a concave shape on the front side in the rectangular portion, and has a protruding portion RU1122j protruding rightward at the center of the concave side edge portion. Further, the pedestal base portion RU1122g is formed in a convex shape on the rear side in the rectangular portion, and has a protruding portion RU1122k protruding rightward in a columnar shape at the center of the convex side edge portion.

  The pedestal column portion RU1122h has a plane having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction at the left end portion, and has screw holes RU1122c and RU1122d at the vertical positions of the plane. Further, in the pedestal column portion RU1122h, the plane of the left end portion is projected forward from the central portion in the vertical direction. The pedestal column portion RU1122h has protruding portions RU1122e and RU1122f that are juxtaposed in the front-rear direction and project in a columnar shape to the left at the protruding portions.

(Mounting the base member RU1122 to the motor mounting plate RU11)
The motor mounting plate RU11 has fitting holes RU11e and RU11f formed at positions corresponding to the protrusions RU1122f and RU1122g of the pedestal member RU1122. The protrusions RU1122j and RU1122k are fitted into the fitting holes RU11e and RU11f, respectively, whereby the pedestal member RU1122 is positioned with respect to the motor mounting plate RU11. Further, the motor mounting plate RU11 has screw holes RU11c and RU11d formed at positions corresponding to the screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b in the pedestal member RU1122. From the pedestal member RU1122 side to the right, the screw RU1124a is screwed into the screw holes RU1122a and screw hole RU11c, and the screw RU1124b is screwed into the screw hole RU1122b and screw hole RU11d. The base member RU1122 is screwed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 120, a mounting position of the pedestal member RU1122 to the motor mounting plate RU11 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120, in the motor mounting plate RU11, the screw hole RU11c and the screw hole RU11d are arranged on the straight line RUDA. The fitting hole RU11e and the fitting hole RU11f are arranged at two points on the straight line RUDB that is substantially perpendicular to the straight line RUDA. The fitting hole RU11e and the fitting hole RU11f are located on opposite sides of the straight line RUDA. The straight line RUDB is a straight line that passes through the center that bisects the line segment that connects the screw hole RU11c and the screw hole RU11d. Here, the fitting hole RU11f has a longitudinal direction in the straight line RUDB direction. As a result, it is possible to allow an error in the spacing in molding the two positioning protrusions in the base member RU1122. The longitudinal direction of the fitting hole RU11f is substantially perpendicular to the tangential direction of rotation of the detection piece RU1112 at the detection position of the sensor RU1121. This makes it possible to prevent erroneous detection of the reference position by the sensor RU1121 even if there is a positional deviation from the pedestal member RU1122 in the fitting hole RU11f having the longitudinal direction.

(Attachment of the sensor RU1121 to the base member RU1122)
The sensor RU1121 engages with the plane of the left end of the pedestal member RU1122, and has a plane that is substantially the same in shape as the plane of the left end of the pedestal member RU1122. That is, the plane located at the right end portion of the sensor RU1121 has a longitudinal direction in the up and down direction and projects forward from the central portion in the up and down direction. The pedestal column portion RU1122h is formed with fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f which are juxtaposed in the front-rear direction at this protruding portion. Further, screw holes RU1121a and RU1121b penetrating in the left-right direction are opened at upper and lower positions of the plane. The screw hole RU1121b is formed in an elongated hole shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction. The fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f are arranged at the positions corresponding to the protrusions RU1122e and RU1122f of the pedestal member RU1122, and the sensor RU1121 is positioned with respect to the pedestal member RU1122 by being fitted and inserted. Further, the sensor RU1121 is configured such that the screw RU1123a is screwed to the screw hole RU1121a and the screw hole RU1122c and the screw RU1123b is screwed to the screw hole RU1121b and the screw hole RU1122d from the sensor RU1121 side to the right. The sensor RU1121 is screwed to the RU1122.

  Here, the attachment position of the sensor RU1121 to the pedestal member RU1122 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. As shown in FIG. 121, in the pedestal member RU1122, the screw hole RU1122c and the screw hole RU1122d are arranged on the straight line RUDC. Then, the protruding portion RU1122e and the protruding portion RU1122f are arranged at two points on the straight line RUDD that is substantially perpendicular to the straight line RUDC. Further, the protruding portion RU1122e and the protruding portion RU1122f are located on the side where the sensor RU1121 detects the detection piece RU1112 rather than the straight line RUDC. The straight line RUDD is a straight line that passes through the center that bisects a line segment that connects the screw hole RU1122c and the screw hole RU1122d. Here, the screw hole RU1122b of the sensor RU1121 screwed together with the screw hole RU1122d has a longitudinal direction in the straight line RUDC direction. As a result, it is possible to allow an error in the spacing in forming the two screw fastening points in the sensor RU1121.

(Upper door mechanism DU)
As shown in FIG. 122, the cabinet G (corresponding to the casing) rotatably supports the upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to the door) at the left end portion. The upper door mechanism DU and the cabinet G are connected by an upper hinge mechanism UH, and the upper hinge mechanism UH is a slide member UH1 attached to the left end portion of the upper door mechanism UD, as shown in FIGS. 123 and 124. And a shaft member UH2 attached to the left end of the upper space of the cabinet G.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the slide member UH1 is formed by bending one plate at three places to form a groove UH11. A bearing mechanism UH12, a positioning portion UH14, an engaging protrusion UH15, a bearing mechanism UH13, and an engaging protrusion UH16 are provided in the groove UH11 from above (U direction).

  The bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13 have a rectangular parallelepiped shape and are attached to the slide member UH1 by screws. Bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are formed at the bottom of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13 so as to overlap and engage with shaft portions UH21 and UH22, which will be described later. The bearing units UH121 and UH131 are opened in a substantially circular shape at the bottom of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13, and the oral cavity is shaped to be smaller upward from the peripheral edge of the opening. The direction in which the centers of the openings of the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are directed upward along the groove UH11 is defined as the axis UH121A.

  The positioning portion UH14 has a curved shape so that it can come into contact with a curved surface of a support portion UH25 of a shaft member UH2, which will be described later, and position the shaft portion UH21 with respect to the bearing portion UH121.

  The engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 have a thin plate shape that horizontally protrudes from the groove UH11. The engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 play a role of engaging engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 described later.

  The shaft member UH2 is formed by bending a single plate. The shaft member UH2 includes a shaft portion UH21 protruding from the upper surface of the supporting portion UH25, a supporting portion UH25, an engaging recess UH23, a shaft portion UH22 protruding from the upper surface of the supporting portion UH26, and a supporting portion UH26 from above. An engaging recess UH24 is provided.

  The shaft portions UH21 and UH22 have a conical shape. The shaft portions UH21 and UH22 play a role of overlapping and engaging with the bearing portions UH121 and UH131.

  The support portions UH25 and UH26 are provided on the shaft member UH2, and the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 are provided on the upper surface. Further, the side surface of the support portion UH25 has a curved shape, and by contacting the curved surface of the positioning portion UH14, the shaft portion UH21 can be positioned with respect to the bearing portion UH121.

  Engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 that are opened horizontally are formed in the engagement plates UH27 and UH28 that extend from the side surfaces of the support portions UH25 and UH26. The engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24 play a role of engaging with the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16.

  Then, by sliding the bearings UH121 and UH131 of the slide member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU onto the shafts UH21 and UH22 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G so as to cover the shaft parts UH21 and UH22 from above to overlap with each other, The upper door mechanism DU can be attached to the cabinet G. At this time, it is desirable that the upper door mechanism DU be attached to the cabinet G while being opened at 90 ° so that the engagement protrusions UH15 / UH16 and the engagement recesses UH23 / UH24 do not engage with each other.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 protrude toward the cabinet G, but the protrusion height is such that the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G (see FIG. 122), the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 are disengaged from the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24. Thereby, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G, the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 of the slide member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU are moved from the shaft portion UH21 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G to the axis line. By sliding above UH121A, the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G with the restriction on the engaging recesses UH23 and UH24 of the engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 being released. Becomes

  In addition, if the protrusion height of the engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 is made lower than that in the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU is formed at an angle smaller than 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G, and the engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 are not bent. The restriction on the engaging recesses UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G. On the other hand, if the protrusion height of the engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 is made higher than that of the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU is formed at an angle larger than 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G, and the engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 are not moved. The restriction on the engaging recesses UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G.

According to the above configuration, the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 engage with the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 until the upper door mechanism DU opens to the cabinet G at a predetermined angle (60 ° in the present embodiment). The bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are restricted from sliding along the axis UH121A. As a result, it is possible to prevent the superposition of the shaft portions UH21 / UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 / UH131 from being released, and to lock the upper door mechanism DU from being removed from the cabinet G.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G, the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 are disengaged from the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24, and the bearings UH121 and UH131 are aligned with the axis UH121A. It becomes possible to slide along. As a result, the superposition of the shaft portions UH21 / UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 / UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.
Further, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (90 ° opening).

  As shown in FIG. 125, the upper door mechanism UD includes a mechanism that emits light in each of the upper and left and right regions of the upper display window UD1 that transmits the image of the display unit A to the front. Specifically, the top panel mechanism HA arranged above the upper display window UD1, the upper left panel mechanism HB arranged in the upper left direction of the upper display window UD1, and the upper right arranged in the upper right direction of the upper display window UD1. The panel mechanism HC, the left lateral panel mechanism HD arranged in the upper left direction of the upper display window UD1, the right lateral panel mechanism HE arranged in the upper right direction of the upper display window UD1, and the left direction of the upper display window UD1. It has a left front panel mechanism HF arranged in the lower part and a right front panel mechanism HG arranged in the lower right direction of the upper display window UD1. Details of each panel mechanism HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, HG will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 126, it has a panel base HH that forms the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD. The above-mentioned panel mechanism HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, HG is provided on the front side of the panel base HH. On the other hand, on the back surface side of the panel base HH, an upper door key receiving member HK, an upper door hinge member HM, and a center frame HL are provided. The upper door key receiving member HK is screwed to the right side portion of the panel base HH. The upper door hinge member HM is screwed to the left side portion of the panel base HH. The center frame HL is horizontally arranged, and its right end portion and left end portion are connected to the lower end portions of the upper door key receiving member HK and the upper door hinge member HM, respectively. A transparent panel UD11 is provided on the upper door key receiving member HK, the upper door hinge member HM, and the center frame HL. The transparent panel UD11 can be attached from the rear by screwing.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Decoration unit HA1)
As shown in FIG. 127, the top panel mechanism HA has a decoration unit HA1 that decorates the upper part of the upper door mechanism UD while emitting light. The decoration unit HA1 forms a decoration protrusion that protrudes forward of the upper display window UD1. The decorative unit HA1 includes a seamless top lens light guide plate HA14 that diffuses light and uniformly emits the light from the surface of the decorative convex portion. As a result, when a plurality of parts are joined to form a light guide plate of the decoration unit HA1, the load concentrates on the joint part of the light guide pieces between the parts, but with the seamless top lens light guide plate HA14. If so, it is possible to avoid the situation where the load is concentrated on a part. As a result, since the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit HA1 including the seamless top lens light guide plate HA14 has large rigidity and strength as a whole, external force is applied from a player or the like located in front of the gaming machine. Even if it is damaged, it is difficult to be deformed or damaged.

  The rear end of the decoration unit HA1 connected to the panel base HH is substantially aligned with the width of the upper door mechanism UD in the left-right direction, and the width of the panel base HH in the left-right direction extends from the left-right ends to the front end. It is reduced in number and is formed in a shape having a vertex at the center of the front end. That is, the decoration unit HA1 has a shape of an isosceles triangle whose base is the panel base HH side.

  As a result, the decoration unit HA1 reduces rigidity and rigidity by reducing the width in the left-right direction on the front end side even if the bending moment increases as the front end moves away from the panel base HH. Strength is increased. As a result, the decoration unit HA1 has a large rigidity and strength in the front region, so that it is difficult for the decoration unit HA1 to be deformed or damaged even when an external force is applied due to contact with a player positioned in front of the decoration unit HA1.

  The decoration unit HA1 has a top lens cover HA11, a top design sheet cover HA12, a design sheet HA13, a top lens light guide plate HA14, and a top lens light guide plate base HA15 arranged in this order from the upper side. The decoration unit HA1 has a top lens left LED board HA17 and a top lens right LED board HA18. The top lens left LED board HA17 and the top lens right LED board HA18 are respectively arranged on the left side and the right side at the rear end of the decoration unit HA1. The top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 have a plurality of LEDs HA17a and HA18a at equal intervals in the left-right direction, and are installed so that light is emitted forward from these LED HA17a and HA18a. ..

  The top lens cover HA11 constitutes an upper surface wall of the decoration unit HA1 and is formed so that light can pass therethrough. The top lens light guide plate HA14 is formed so that the light from the top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 is taken in from the rear end face and is uniformly emitted from the front end face. The top lens cover HA11 is displayed through the design sheet cover HA12. The top lens light guide plate base HA15 constitutes the lower surface wall of the decoration unit HA1 and is formed so as not to transmit light.

  The decoration unit HA1 forms a hollow portion with the top lens light guide plate base HA15 and the top lens cover HA11, and accommodates the top design sheet cover HA12, the design sheet HA13, and the top lens light guide plate HA14 in the hollow portion. As a result, the top lens light guide plate base HA15, the top lens cover HA11, the top lens light guide plate HA14, and the like are laminated to form a plate having a large second moment of area and high rigidity. ..

  Further, an opening HA15a is formed in the top lens light guide plate base HA15. The opening portion HA15a is arranged so as to face the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens described later. The opening HA15a is provided with a top lens middle LED board concealing member HA16. The top lens middle LED board concealing member HA16 functions as a reflector for the top lens middle LED board HA411, and also opens and closes the opening HA15a. It works as a window. The LED lens concealing member HA16 in the top lens may be formed to transmit a part of the light from the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the decoration unit HA1 has a front region curved downward. As a result, the decoration unit HA1 allows light to pass through the front upper side and the front side of the upper door mechanism UD to make the design visible. The lower surface of the top lens light guide plate HA14 is a reflector that reflects light. As a result, the decoration unit HA1 allows the light from the top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 to travel through a downwardly curved front region and reflect a portion of the light at the reflector on the back surface. It is possible to change the front diagonally downward.

  The irradiation light device B is arranged behind the decoration unit HA1. Here, behind the decoration unit HA1, the decoration unit HA1 projects forward, so a large space is secured as much as the projection. As a result, the decoration unit HA1 can increase the degree of freedom in arranging the mirrors with respect to the above-described light reflection type irradiation light device B with mirrors provided in a large space. Further, since the decoration unit HA1 has high rigidity and strength, it is possible to sufficiently protect the irradiation light device B.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the top lens cover HA11 in the decoration unit HA1 is supported by the decoration unit support mechanism HI in which the front region curved downward is horizontally arranged. The decoration unit support mechanism HI includes a horizontal protrusion HA11a horizontally protruding rearward from the back surface of the top lens cover HA11, a horizontal protrusion HH1 horizontally protruding forward from the front surface of the panel base HH, and a horizontal protrusion. A plurality of sets of connecting screws HH2, in which the parts HA11a and HH1 are screwed together, are provided in the left-right direction.

  As a result, in the decoration unit HA1, the back surface of the front region, which is curved downward, is connected to the panel base HH via the horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism HI, so that the back surface of the front region is supported by the decoration unit support mechanism. It is supported horizontally by HI. Therefore, the decoration unit HA1 has a structure in which the front region has large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Left edge light emitting mechanism HA2, Right edge light emitting mechanism HA3)
As shown in FIG. 130, the top panel mechanism HA includes a left end light emitting mechanism HA2 that planarly emits light from the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD and a right end light emitting mechanism HA3 that planarly emits light from the right end region of the upper door mechanism UD. have. Specifically, the left edge light emitting mechanism HA2 is arranged on the left rear side of the upper left speaker device UD2. The left edge light emitting mechanism HA2 has a left LED substrate HA21. The left LED substrate HA21 is set so that the substrate surface faces the front side. Two LED HAs 22 are arranged on the substrate surface of the left LED substrate HA21. These LED HAs 22 are set to emit light in the direction normal to the surface of the substrate, and cause the left side region of the upper left speaker device UD2 (the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD) to emit light with a predetermined intensity or more. It has become.

  On the other hand, the right edge light emitting mechanism HA3 is arranged on the right rear side of the upper right speaker device UD3. The right edge light emitting mechanism HA3 has a right LED substrate HA31. The right LED substrate HA31 is set so that the substrate surface faces the front side. Two LED HAs 32 are arranged on the substrate surface of the right LED substrate HA31. These LED HAs 32 are set so as to emit light in the direction normal to the surface of the substrate, so that the region on the right side of the upper right speaker device UD3 (the right end region of the upper door mechanism UD) emits light with a predetermined intensity or more. It has become.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emission mechanism HA4)
The top panel mechanism HA further has a central light emitting mechanism HA4. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 is arranged on the center side of the upper door mechanism UD, which is between the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 is configured to emit light in a region where it is difficult for the left edge light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right edge light emitting mechanism HA3 to emit light with a light intensity higher than a predetermined level.

  Specifically, the central light emitting mechanism HA4 includes a first illumination mechanism HA41 that emits light from the left peripheral region on the left end region side and a right peripheral region on the right end region side, and a second illumination mechanism that emits light from the front end portion of the decoration unit HA1. It has HA42 and the 3rd illumination mechanism HA43 which makes the lower part of the decoration unit HA1 light-emit. In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the first illumination mechanism HA41 emits light in both the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right end region side is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first illumination mechanism HA41 may be configured to emit light in at least one of the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right end region side.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: First illumination mechanism HA41)
As also shown in FIG. 131, the first illumination mechanism HA41 has a top lens middle LED substrate HA411 arranged below the substantially central portion of the decoration unit HA1. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 guides the light emitted from the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens to the left peripheral region and the right peripheral region by the light guide mechanism, so that it is difficult for the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 to guide light. Even in the region, light is emitted with a light intensity higher than a predetermined level. That is, the first illuminating mechanism HA41 includes the LED HA 4111 which is a plurality of upper light sources provided on the upper surface of the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens and the top lens in the top lens which is arranged so as to cover the lower surface and the side surface of the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens. It has a reflector HA 412. The top surface of the LED substrate in the top lens HA411 is covered with the LED member in the top lens concealing member HA16 of the decoration unit HA1 in FIG. 127, and the reflector in the top lens LED substrate concealing member HA16 reflects the light from the LED HA4111. Is functioning as.

  On the upper surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, a translucent left light guiding lens HA413 and a translucent right light guiding lens that guide the light from the LED HA4111 to the left and right upper light guiding regions to emit light in a planar manner. An upper light guiding mechanism having a configuration in which the HA 414 and the HA 414 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens is provided. More specifically, the right end of the horizontally arranged left light guiding lens HA413 is arranged on the upper surface of the left end of the LED lens HA411 in the top lens, and the light of the LED HA4111 can be incident from the end of this right end. Has been done. The left light guide lens HA413 has a left end portion located above the upper left speaker device UD2, and emits light upward from the middle portion to the left end portion, whereby the upper light guide portion on the center side from the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD. The area is made to emit light.

  On the other hand, on the upper surface of the right end portion of the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens, the left end portion of the right light guide lens HA 414 arranged horizontally is arranged, and the light of the LED HA 4111 can be made incident from the end surface of this left end portion. The right light guide lens HA414 has a right end portion located above the upper right speaker device UD3, and emits light upward from the middle portion to the right end portion, so that an area (upper side) from the right end area of the upper door mechanism UD (upper side). The light guiding area) is made to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 132, a lower light guide mechanism that guides light from the lower light source to the lower light guide region to planarly emit light is provided on the lower surface of the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens. .. More specifically, a plurality of LED HAs 4112 serving as lower light sources are provided on the lower surface of the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens. On the lower surface of the right end of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, the left end of the horizontally arranged translucent right downlight lens HA415 is arranged, and the light of the LED HA4112 can be incident from the end face of this left end. There is. The right end portion of the right downlight lens HA415 is located above the upper right speaker device UD3, and the light is emitted downward from the middle portion to the right end portion of the right downlight lens HA415. The light area is made to emit light. That is, the right downlight lens HA415 illuminates the periphery of the lower light guide area HA5d (see FIG. 125), which is the front area of the upper right speaker device UD3 of the panel base HH, and surrounds the non-transparent lower light guide area HA5d. This member emits light when it functions as a reflector. Further, the lower light guide mechanism has a left downlight lens (not shown) having the same configuration as the right downlight lens HA415. The left downlight lens HA415 and the right downlight lens HA415 are arranged symmetrically about the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: Second illumination mechanism HA42)
As shown in FIG. 131, the second illumination mechanism HA42 has a central lens upper LED substrate HA421 disposed below the top lens middle LED substrate HA411. A plurality of LEDHAs 4211 are provided on the upper surface of the central lens upper LEDHA 421. The lower surface of the LED HA4211 is covered with a central lens reflector HA422.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the upper surface of the central lens upper LED substrate HA421 is covered with the top lens light guide plate base HA15. Further, a translucent center lens A423 is arranged below the central lens upper LED substrate HA421. The center lens A423 is provided such that the upper end thereof exposes the central lens upper LED substrate HA421 through the gap between the top lens light guide plate base HA15 and the panel base HH, and the light of the LEDHA4211 is incident from the end face of the upper end. The light is emitted from the lower end surface formed and arranged along the lower end of the top lens light guide plate base HA15.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: Third illumination mechanism HA43)
The third illumination mechanism HA43 has a lower central LED substrate HA431 arranged on the rear side of the central lens upper LED substrate HA421. The lower center LED substrate HA431 is provided such that the normal line direction of the front surface thereof substantially coincides with the front direction. A plurality of LED HAs 4311 are provided on the front surface of the lower center LED substrate HA 431. A light-transmitting lower center lens HA432 is disposed in front of the lower center LED substrate HA431. The lower central lens HA432 is provided below the panel base HH, and is configured to cause the light of the LED HA4311 to emit light in the lower region of the decoration unit HA1.

(Upper door mechanism UD: left side panel mechanism HD / right side panel mechanism HE / left front panel mechanism HF / right front panel mechanism HG)
Hereinafter, a mechanism in which the left lateral panel mechanism HD and the left front panel mechanism HF are integrated will be referred to as a left panel mechanism HJ, and a mechanism in which the right lateral panel mechanism HE and the right front panel mechanism HG are integrated will be described as a right panel mechanism HK. The left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism HK function as a light emitting unit arranged on the side of the front surface of the screen mechanism D as a production device. Since the left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism K are configured symmetrically with respect to each other with the screen mechanism D interposed therebetween, only the left panel mechanism HJ will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the left panel mechanism HJ includes a partitioning mechanism HJ2 that functions as a partitioning member, an upper left side lens HJ3 that functions as a side light transmitting member, and a lower left lens HJ4 that functions as a front light transmitting member. , The inner light guide member HJ5. The left panel mechanism HJ has a left LED substrate HJ1 as a light source device to be described later, and light from the left LED substrate HJ1 is emitted to the outside from the upper left side lens HJ3, the lower left lens HJ4, and the left light guide plate HJ5. Is configured to be.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the left panel mechanism HJ includes an upper left side lens HJ3, a lower left lens HJ4, a partition plate HJ21 functioning as a partition mechanism HJ2, a left LED substrate case HJ22, and a left LED. It has a substrate HJ1, a left light guide plate HJ51 that functions as an inner light guide member HJ5, and a left LED substrate cover HJ52.

  The left LED substrate HJ1 is set such that the normal line direction of the substrate surface substantially coincides with the front direction. Four LEDs HJ11 and six LEDs HJ12 are arranged on the front surface of the left LED substrate HJ1. These LEDHJ11 and LEDHJ12 are set to emit light in the normal direction (forward direction) of the substrate surface. Further, six LEDs HJ13 are arranged on the surface of the left LED substrate HJ1 opposite to the surface on which the LEDs HJ11 and LEDHJ12 are arranged. These LEDs HJ13 are set to emit light in the normal direction (backward direction) of the substrate surface.

  The left LED substrate HJ1 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction, and has an upper end region formed wide in the right direction. The LEDs HJ12 are arranged substantially in one line from the upper end to the center along the left edge in the longitudinal direction. Further, in the LEDHJ11, two sets are arranged in a line on a straight line having an inclination from the central part to the lower left part with a wider interval than the set. Further, the LEDHJ13 is arranged in a substantially even manner in one line from the upper end to the lower end of the central region along the right edge of the surface opposite to the LEDHJ11 and the LEDHJ12.

  The left LED board case HJ22 is a case that accommodates the left LED board HJ1 that is formed in substantially the same shape as the left LED board HJ1 in a front view from the front side. The left LED substrate case HJ22 is provided with through holes HJ221 for passing light from the LEDs HJ11 in the forward direction at positions corresponding to the respective LEDs HJ11. Further, the left LED substrate case HJ22 is provided with through holes HJ222 for passing the light from the LEDs HJ12 in the forward direction at positions corresponding to the respective LEDs HJ12. That is, four through holes HJ221 are arranged in a straight line, and six through holes HJ222 are arranged in a straight line. The plane area HJ22a in which the four through holes HJ221 are formed and the plane area HJ22b in which the six through holes HJ222 are formed are defined by a bending line extending from the center left end to the upper end of the surface of the left LED substrate case HJ22. Be divided. The plane area HJ22a is set higher than the plane area HJ22b in the front direction, and a step HJ22c is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the partition plate HJ21 has a mountain shape having a vertex at the front end in a side view. Specifically, the partition plate HJ21 is formed in a substantially pyramidal shape with the flat surface region HJ22b as the bottom surface. The bottom surface of the partition plate HJ21 on the side of the plane area HJ22b and the left side surface are open. Further, the upper wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to reach the apex with a downward inclination while decreasing the width in the left-right direction from the upper edge of the plane area HJ22b to the front. Further, the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to reach the apex with an inclination in the left direction while the width in the vertical direction is reduced forward. Thus, the right side wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed to extend from the step HJ22c. That is, the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can divide the light emitted from the left LED substrate HJ1 in the forward direction into LEDHJ11 and LEDHJ12.

  The upper left side lens HJ3 is formed in a substantially triangular flat plate shape whose peripheral shape substantially matches the opened left side surface of the partition plate HJ21. That is, the partition plate HJ21, the upper left side lens HJ3, and the left LED substrate HJ1 form an internal space HJ23 to which light is emitted from the LED HJ12. The upper left side lens HJ3 is made of a light transmissive material and constitutes a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 exists in the front direction of the LED HJ12. Therefore, part of the light emitted from the LED HJ12 is reflected by the partition plate HJ21. Since the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 has an inclination, it is reflected by light having at least a component to the left. In this way, the light reflected by the partition plate HJ21 reaches the upper left side lens HJ3. The upper left side lens HJ3 is decorated such that the inner wall surface is formed by arranging quadrangular pyramids having vertices on the inner side in a matrix. As a result, the light reaching the upper left side lens HJ3 is irregularly refracted and transmitted to the outside. As described above, the partition mechanism HJ2 having the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can split the light in the front direction into two and guide the light divided into one in the side direction. Further, the upper left side lens HJ3 can transmit the one of the light guided by the partition structure HJ2. The partition plate HJ21 is preferably white for increasing the reflectance, but is not limited to this.

  The lower left lens HJ4 is arranged in front of the left LED board case HJ22 so as to form an internal space HJ41 with the plane area HJ22a of the left LED board case HJ22. The lower left lens HJ4 is formed of a translucent material and constitutes a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the front side wall surface of the lower left lens HJ4 exists in the front direction of the LED HJ11. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED HJ11 reaches the lower left lens HJ4. The inner surface of the lower left lens HJ4 is decorated in a zigzag shape in a side view. As a result, the light reaching the lower left lens HJ4 is irregularly refracted and transmitted to the outside. In this way, the lower left lens HJ4 can transmit the light divided into the other by the partition structure HJ2. The decorative structure of the inner wall surface of the upper left side lens HJ3 or the lower left lens HJ4 is not limited to this, and may be any structure that irregularly refracts incident light and emits it to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the left light guide plate HJ51 has a light incident portion HJ511, an optical path portion HJ512, and a light emitting portion HJ513. The left light guide plate HJ51 is made of a translucent material. The light incident part HJ511 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction. The light incident portion HJ511 has depressions at upper and lower portions, and a protrusion HJ511a having a convex cross-section extending in the vertical direction is provided at the center of each of the depressions in the left-right direction. Further, the light incident portion HJ511 has a through hole HJ511b extending adjacent to the left side of the protruding portion HJ511a. The left LED substrate cover HJ52 has a shape that engages with the rear side surface of the light incident portion HJ511 of the left light guide plate HJ51. The left LED substrate cover HJ52 has a protrusion HJ52a having a convex cross-section extending in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction, and is fitted into the through hole HJ511b. The left LED substrate cover HJ52 is made of a non-translucent material.

  The protruding portion HJ511a is provided so as to face the LED HJ13 arranged on the left LED substrate HJ1. The light from the LED HJ13 enters from the front side of the protrusion HJ511a. The left light guide plate HJ51 has an inclined surface HJ511c in which the incident surface is inclined to the right by approximately 45 degrees in the traveling direction of the incident light on the protruding portion HJ511a. Since the inclined surface HJ511c is arranged so as to contact the left LED substrate cover HJ52, the light incident on the protrusion HJ511a is reflected by the inclined surface HJ511c and then proceeds to the right. The light traveling rightward passes through the optical path portion HJ512 and reaches the light emitting portion HJ513. The optical path portion HJ512 is formed to be bent rearward from the right end portion of the light incident portion HJ511. The optical path portion HJ512 is set so that the normal direction is the front right direction. The light emitting portion HJ513 is formed so as to be bent from the right end portion of the optical path portion HJ512. The light emitting unit HJ513 is set such that the normal direction is the front right direction. Further, the light emitting portion HJ513 is decorated in a zigzag shape in a front view cross section at the right end portion. As a result, the light reaching the right end of the light emitting unit HJ513 is irregularly refracted and is radiated to the front surface of the screen mechanism D or the like.

(Upper door mechanism UD: upper left panel mechanism HB / upper right panel mechanism HC)
Hereinafter, the upper left panel mechanism HB and the upper right panel mechanism HC are configured symmetrically with respect to each other with the left and right panel mechanisms HB interposed therebetween, and therefore only the upper left panel mechanism HB will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 141, the upper left panel mechanism HB is fitted into a substantially triangular gap formed at the upper left end of the panel base HH and the left rear end of the top lens cover HA11 of the top panel mechanism HA. Is located in. The upper left panel mechanism HB has a substantially right-angled triangular shape having a right angle at the left front corner portion when viewed from above, and has an upper surface portion HB1 in which the width in the left-right direction is enlarged from the rear end to the front end. A tight screw HH4 can be screwed into the upper left end of the panel base HH from the rear. The tight screw HH4 projects to the front of the panel base HH and can be fitted into the upper left panel mechanism HB.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the upper left panel mechanism HB has a fitting portion HB11 at the rear end portion, and the tight screw HH4 is fitted therein. Further, the upper left panel mechanism HB has a frame portion HB2 formed so as to be hung downward from the left front end portion. The frame portion HB2 has a restriction portion HB21 at the lower end portion which projects rearward and is bent downward. When the upper left panel mechanism HB is attached to the panel base HH, the restriction portion HB21 extends to the rear position of the fitting portion HH3 of the panel base HH that engages with the frame portion HB2. That is, since the restriction portion HB21 is present at the rear position of the fitting portion HH3, the movement in the front direction is restricted. The frame portion HB2 is decorated such that the inner wall surface has an array of triangular pyramids protruding inward, and allows light from a light source from the rear to be irregularly refracted.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the upper left panel mechanism HB has locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14 are arranged at positions adjacent to the top lens cover HA11 on the front side of the fitting portion HH3, and are in a direction different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11, and from the arrangement position to the top lens cover HA11. It is formed so as to project in the direction. Specifically, the locking piece HB12 is located in the rear end region of the right edge portion of the fitting portion HB11 and projects rightward substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking piece HB13 is located substantially at the center of the right edge portion of the fitting portion HB11, and projects to the right rear direction at an angle of about 45 degrees with the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking piece HB14 is located at the front end of the right edge portion of the fitting portion HB11 and projects rightward substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14 are projected from a position lower than the outer surface of the upper surface portion HB1.

  On the other hand, the top lens cover HA11 is formed with notches HA111, HA112, and HA113 that are engaged with the locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14. The cutouts HA111, HA112, and HA113 are cutouts formed on the inner wall surface of the top lens cover HA11. The cutouts HA111, HA112, HA113 are made to adjoin the top lens cover HA11 with the locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14 engaged, and the tight screw HH4 is fitted to the fitting part HB11 via the panel base HH. As a result, the horizontal movement of the upper left panel mechanism HB is restricted by the panel base HH and the top lens cover HA11. Further, the restriction portion HB21 restricts the forward movement of the upper left panel mechanism HB.

The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment has the following features.
(1-1) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying the image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2),
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1),
A power source via a pin (slide member E26) movable inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) with respect to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22). A driving force transmission mechanism (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the (driving motor E25),
In the arm (crank member E22), the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) so that the pin (slide member E26) passes through the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22). E22b) operates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force, while the display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in the first position (front standby) in conjunction with the operation of the arm (crank member E22). Position) and a second position (front exposure position),
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts its operation from the first position (front standby position) toward the second position (front exposure position), the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) is started. The driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), and the display means (front screen mechanism E1) moves from the second position (front exposure position) to the It is formed along a direction in which a driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26) when starting the operation toward the first position (front standby position). There is.

(1-2) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying the image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2),
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1),
With respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22), a motor (via a slide member (slide member E26) slidable inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) is used. A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25),
The arm (crank member E22) slides through the slide member (slide member E26) by sliding the slide member (slide member E26) inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b). While the driving force is transmitted to the groove E22b), the display unit (the front screen mechanism E1) operates in association with the movement of the arm (crank member E22) to the first position (front). It operates between the standby position) and the second position (front exposure position),
The slide groove (slide groove E22b) is at a time point when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts operation from the first position (front standby position) toward the second position (front exposure position). The moving direction of the slide member (slide member E26) and the operation of the display unit (front screen mechanism E1) from the second position (front exposure position) toward the first position (front standby position). The groove wall surface (groove wall surface E22b1) is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member (slide member E26) at the time of starting.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the slide groove E22b includes the moving direction of the slide member E26 when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position toward the front exposed position, and the front screen. The groove wall surface E22b1 is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member E26 at the time when the mechanism E1 starts operating from the front exposure position toward the front standby position. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts its operation from the front standby position toward the front exposed position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 moves from the front exposed position to the front exposed position. When starting the operation toward the standby position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member.

  Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts its operation from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts its operation from the front exposure position toward the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 The operation of can be made gradual. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be smoothly driven, and the load on the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25 from being damaged. Further, since the front screen mechanism E1 can be smoothly driven without devising a pulse output, it is not necessary to perform complicated excitation control, and the control load for driving the front screen mechanism E1 can be kept low. be able to.

  Further, when it is necessary to perform the excitation control in order to smoothly drive the front screen mechanism E1, when the size of the front screen mechanism E1 is changed, it is necessary to change the design of the excitation control. Takes time. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 can be smoothly driven without performing the excitation control, so that such trouble does not occur, and the front It is possible to easily cope with changes in specifications such as the size of the screen mechanism E1.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position toward the front exposed position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front. It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member when the operation is started from the exposed position toward the front standby position. That is, the slide operation is performed both when the front screen mechanism E1 starts its operation from the front standby position to the front exposed position and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts its operation from the front exposed position to the front standby position. It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the groove E22b. However, in the present invention, one of the case where the front screen mechanism starts operation from the front standby position toward the front exposed position and the case where the front screen mechanism starts operation from the front exposed position toward the front standby position Only in the case, the driving force may not be transmitted to the slide groove.

  Here, the position of the pin when the display means is at the first position (relative position with respect to the pin receiving portion) is referred to as a first predetermined position, and when the display means is at the second position. The position of the pin (position relative to the pin receiving portion) is referred to as a second predetermined position. In this case, the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the moving direction of the pin at the time when the display unit starts the operation from the first position to the second position (the pin is actually irrelevant to the pin receiving portion. The second predetermined position of the pin receiving portion is the moving direction of the pin at the time when the display means starts the operation from the second position toward the first position. It may be formed along (the direction in which the pin actually moves regardless of the pin receiving portion). The first predetermined position and the second predetermined position may be the same position or different positions.

  Further, the driving force transmission mechanism includes a driving force transmission body (for example, a gear) that rotates about the first straight line as an axis according to the driving force generated from the power source, and the pin is fixed to the driving force transmission body. May be. Then, the first predetermined position of the pin receiving portion is formed in a direction perpendicular to the pin at the first predetermined position and a straight line connecting the intersection (for example, the center of the gear) of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body. The second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is a direction perpendicular to the pin located at the second predetermined position and a straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (for example, the center of the gear). It may be formed in.

  As a result, the direction of the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the direction in which the pin moves when the display means starts the operation from the first position to the second position (concentric with the driving force transmission body). Tangential direction of a circle whose radius is the distance between the center of the driving force transmission body and the pin at the first predetermined position), and the second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is Direction in which the pin is about to move when the operation is started from the position of the driving force transmitting member toward the first position Tangential direction of a circle whose radius is the distance of). Therefore, when the display means starts the operation from the first position to the second position, the driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin, and the display means moves from the second position to the first position. The driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when the operation is started toward. Thereby, when the display means is in the vicinity of the first position and the second position, the operation of the display means can be made gentle.

  The target driven by the drive mechanism is not particularly limited, and the drive mechanism may be the following drive mechanism.

A drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A driving force transmission mechanism that transmits a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion;
The arm operates in conjunction with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin as the pin moves inside the pin receiving portion, while the movable body is The movement is performed between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the movement of the arm,
In the pin receiving portion, when the movable body starts operating from the first position toward the second position, the driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin, and the movable body Is formed along a direction in which a driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when starting the operation from the second position toward the first position.
A drive mechanism characterized by the above.

A drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A driving force transmission mechanism that transmits a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion;
The arm operates in conjunction with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin as the pin moves inside the pin receiving portion, while the movable body is The movement is performed between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the movement of the arm,
The pin receiving portion includes a moving direction of the pin when the movable body starts operating from the first position to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the second position. 1 is formed along the moving direction of the pin at the time of starting the operation toward the position 1.
A drive mechanism characterized by the above.

(2-1) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying the image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2),
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1),
A power source via a pin (slide member E26) movable inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) with respect to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22). A driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) that transmits the driving force generated from the (driving motor E25),
The driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) rotates about the first straight line as an axis according to the driving force generated from the power source (driving motor E25),
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21),
In the arm (crank member E22), the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) as the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) rotates. While the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is rotated by the arm (crank). Interlocking with the rotation of the member E22), it rotates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21). In the direction of the straight line connecting the intersection point with (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position). In this case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). The direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position) in the direction of the straight line connecting the intersections with (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b). In this case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). This is the direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22).

(2-2) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying the image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2),
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1),
With respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22), a motor (via a slide member (slide member E26) slidable inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) is used. A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25),
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates according to the driving force generated from the motor (driving motor E25),
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21),
In the arm (crank member E22), the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) in accordance with the rotation of the gear (crank gear E21), and thus the slide member. While the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the (slide member E26), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is rotated by the arm (crank member E22). ) In conjunction with the rotation of the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposure position),
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position) and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position) , A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), and the arm (crank member E22). ) And the straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (the straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) are substantially orthogonal to each other.

(3-1) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying the image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2),
An accommodating portion (screen casing C10) for accommodating the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) therein;
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1),
A power source via a pin (slide member E26) movable inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) with respect to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22). A driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) that transmits the driving force generated from the (driving motor E25),
The driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) rotates about the first straight line as an axis according to the driving force generated from the power source (driving motor E25),
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21),
In the arm (crank member E22), the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) as the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) rotates. While the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is rotated by the arm (crank). Interlocking with the rotation of the member E22), it rotates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21). In the direction of the straight line connecting the intersection point with (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position). In this case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). The direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) is located at the second position (front exposure position) in the direction of the straight line connecting the intersection points with (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b). In this case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). The direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The housing (screen housing C10) is provided with openings (operation openings C21 and C31) at positions where the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated.

(III-2) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying the image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2),
A drive mechanism casing (screen casing C10) for housing the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) therein;
A main body (cabinet G) for housing the drive mechanism casing (screen casing C10);
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable,
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1),
With respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22), a motor (via a slide member (slide member E26) slidable inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) is used. A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25),
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates according to the driving force generated from the motor (driving motor E25),
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21),
In the arm (crank member E22), the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) in accordance with the rotation of the gear (crank gear E21), and thus the slide member. While the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the (slide member E26), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is rotated by the arm (crank member E22). ) In conjunction with the rotation of the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposure position),
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position) and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position) , A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), and the arm (crank member E22). ) And the straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (the straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) are substantially orthogonal to each other,
The drive mechanism casing (screen casing C10) is provided with openings (operation openings C21 and C31) at positions where the gear (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated.

(3-3) The opening (operation openings C21 and C31) is a first opening (for operation) provided on one side surface (right side plate C2) of the drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10). A second opening (operation C21) provided in the opening C21) and a side surface (left side plate C3) facing the one side surface (right side plate C2) of the side surfaces of the drive mechanism case (screen case C10). And an opening C31) for
The first opening (operation opening C21) and the second opening (operation opening C31) are formed to have substantially the same size and substantially the same shape.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position and when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposed position, the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentricity are eccentric. A straight line connecting the position E21b and a straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21 are substantially orthogonal to each other.

  As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposed position, a force for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 (manually) without depending on the driving force generated from the drive motor E25 is applied to the front screen mechanism E1. When applied to the mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b. Therefore, the force applied to the slide member E26 is not converted into the force for rotating the crank gear E21 (the direction in which the force acts is from the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b). If it deviates even a little, it is converted into a force for rotating the crank gear E21). Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposed position, even if the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated by moving the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22 by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 is Does not rotate. As a result, it is possible to prevent a person who handles the front screen mechanism E1 from directly touching the front screen mechanism E1 and forcibly moving the front screen mechanism E1.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when realizing that the front screen mechanism E1 is not manually rotated when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position or the front exposed position, It is not necessary to separately add a member or the like for locking the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1, and it is possible to prevent the cost from increasing.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen drive mechanism E2 is housed inside the screen casing C10, and the crank gear E21 is manually rotated in the screen casing C10. The operation openings C21 and C31 are provided at positions where it is possible. Therefore, a person who handles the front screen mechanism E1 can rotate the front screen mechanism E1 by manually rotating the crank gear E21 from the operation openings C21 and C31. Therefore, although it is not possible to rotate the front screen mechanism E1 by directly touching the front screen mechanism E1, a means for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 is separately secured, which reduces the convenience. Can be prevented. In addition, when the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated by manually rotating the crank gear E21, the front screen mechanism E1 is not directly touched, and therefore a large load is applied to the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible to reduce the risk that the screen mechanism E1 will be damaged.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the screen housing C10 is provided with openings (operation openings C21 and C31) of substantially the same size and shape on the pair of side surfaces. The screen housing C10 can be carried by hooking the two openings. In this way, the operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, by manually rotating the crank gear E21 from the opening as a handle, The front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposed position, a force for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 (manually) regardless of the driving force generated from the drive motor E25. Is applied to the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 should match the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b. As explained. That is, it has been described that the front screen mechanism E1 is not manually rotated (locked) both when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position and when it is at the front exposed position. However, in the present invention, the front screen mechanism may not be manually rotated (locked) only when the front screen mechanism is at the front standby position or the front exposed position. ..

  The target driven by the drive mechanism is not particularly limited, and the drive mechanism may be the following drive mechanism.

A drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A pin receiving portion formed on the arm, and a driving force transmitting body that transmits a driving force generated from a power source via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion,
The driving force transmitting body rotates about the first straight line as an axis according to the driving force generated from the power source,
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmission body,
The arm is interlocked with the fact that the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin as the pin moves inside the pin receiving portion in accordance with the rotation of the driving force transmitting body. While rotating, the movable body rotates between a first position and a second position in conjunction with rotation of the arm,
When the movable body is in the first position, the movable body is in the first position in the direction of the pin and the straight line connecting the intersections of the first straight line and the driving force transmission body. In the case, it is the direction of the force applied to the pin when a force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm without depending on the driving force generated from the power source,
When the movable body is in the second position, the movable body is in the second position in the direction of the pin and the straight line connecting the intersections of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body. In this case, it is the direction of the force applied to the pin when the force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm without depending on the driving force generated from the power source.
A drive mechanism characterized by the above.

A drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A pin receiving portion formed on the arm, and a driving force transmitting body that transmits a driving force generated from a power source via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion,
The driving force transmitting body rotates about the first straight line as an axis according to the driving force generated from the power source,
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmission body,
The arm is interlocked with the fact that the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion in accordance with the rotation of the driving force transmitting body. , While rotating about the second straight line as an axis, the movable body rotates between a first position and a second position in conjunction with rotation of the arm,
A straight line connecting the pin and the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body when the movable body is at the first position and when the movable body is at the second position. , The intersection of the second straight line and the arm and the line connecting the pins are orthogonal to each other,
A drive mechanism characterized by the above.

  Note that the first straight line and the second straight line may be parallel to each other, in which case a view seen from the direction of the first straight line (the direction of the second straight line) (for example, a side view of the drive mechanism). In, a straight line connecting the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body and the pin (for example, a straight line connecting the center of the gear to the pin), and a second straight line and the straight line connecting the arm and the pin (for example, The straight line connecting the rotation center of the arm and the pin) should be orthogonal.

(4-1) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door) which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) in which an image displayed by the display unit (display unit A) can be visually recognized. Mechanism UD),
The display unit (display unit A) is
A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2),
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects the light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backwards;
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3);
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). A different second screen (fixed screen mechanism D),
A screen casing (screen casing C10) for accommodating the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D);
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), and the screen housing (screen housing) C10) is unitized,
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position) by being driven by a driving mechanism (front screen driving mechanism E2). With the
The second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is disposed behind the second position (front exposure position), and the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is disposed at the second position (front exposure position). ), The image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), while the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position. In the (front standby position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D),
Regarding the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) has lower brightness.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the two screens of the front screen mechanism E1 and the fixed screen mechanism D are housed in the screen housing C10. The front screen mechanism E1 operates between the front standby position and the front exposure position by being driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2, while the fixed screen mechanism D is disposed behind the front exposure position. , The image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position, while it is projected by the projector mechanism B2 when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position. The displayed image is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Therefore, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, and the fixed screen when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D. Comparing the position of the mechanism D, the fixed screen mechanism D is located behind the screen housing C10 rather than the front screen mechanism E1.

  Here, the back side of the screen housing C10 is more affected by diffused reflection due to light being reflected by the wall of the screen housing C10, so the fixed screen mechanism D is more so-called white than the front screen mechanism E1. Blurring is likely to occur. In view of this point, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the brightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is lower than the brightness of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D from being blurred and to improve the sharpness of the image.

(4-2) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door) which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) in which an image displayed by the display unit (display unit A) can be visually recognized. Mechanism UD),
The display unit (display unit A) is
A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2),
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects the light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backwards;
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having one display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3);
A second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) having a plurality of display surfaces capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). ,
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) are unitized. Cage,
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position) by being driven by a driving mechanism (front screen driving mechanism E2). With the
When the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1). On the other hand, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is the second screen (fixed screen mechanism). D),
Regarding the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) has lower brightness.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 has one display surface, and the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces. Since the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces, the influence of irregular reflection due to the reflection of light between the display surfaces is large, and so-called white blur is likely to occur. However, the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above. Then, the brightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is set lower than that of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D from being blurred and to improve the sharpness of the image.

  In the present invention, the first screen whose display surface is perpendicular to the optical axis of the irradiation light and the second screen whose display surface is not perpendicular to the optical axis of the irradiation light are provided, and the brightness of the second screen is adjusted. It may be lower than the brightness of the first screen. Also in this case, it is possible to prevent the image displayed on the second screen from being blurred.

(5-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image and a screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) are provided. , A display unit (display unit A) configured by being unitized,
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen (front screen mechanism E1) can be viewed. Equipped with
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a first member (front screen member E11) having the display surface (projection surface E11a) and a second member having a surface provided with a convex portion (second pattern surface E12b). Member (front screen support E12) and a surface of the first member (front screen member E11) opposite to the display surface (projection surface E11a) and the second member (front screen support E12). 2) is formed by being fixed so that the surface (second pattern surface E12b) on which the convex portion is provided and the surface on the opposite side are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 includes the front screen member E11 having the projection surface E11a and the front screen support base E12 having the second pattern surface E12b in the front screen member E11. It is formed by fixing the surface on the side opposite to the projection surface E11a and the surface on the side opposite to the second pattern surface E12b on the front screen support E12 so as to be in contact with each other. As described above, since the member having the projection surface E11a and the member having the second pattern surface E12b are configured by different members, they are caused by the convex portion of the second pattern surface E12b in the process of molding the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, a sink mark is formed on the projection surface E11a, and the accuracy of the screen is prevented from being lowered. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display an image on the screen with good accuracy.

(5-2) The surface (second pattern surface E12b) of the screen (front screen mechanism E1) on which the convex portion is provided is provided with irregular decoration,
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) operates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position) by being driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2). And then
When the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the screen (front screen mechanism E1), When the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the surface (second pattern surface E12b) provided with the convex portion. The decorated decoration is arranged so as to be visible through the display area (upper display window UD1).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 has the second pattern surface E12b (the surface opposite to the projection surface E11a, that is, the screen). The decoration provided on the back surface is arranged so as to be visible through the upper display window UD1. Therefore, if the decoration is not applied, the back surface of the front screen mechanism E1 will be directly visible to the player if the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position. This is not desirable because the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is significantly impaired. From such a viewpoint, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the back surface of the front screen mechanism E1 is decorated.

  However, if the front screen mechanism E1 with such a decoration is to be integrally formed, a sink mark is formed on the projection surface E11a of the front screen mechanism E1 due to the convex portion that constitutes the decoration, and the accuracy as a screen is reduced. Will fall. In view of this point, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the member having the projection surface E11 and the member having the decorated surface are configured as different members, and both members are fixed, The front screen mechanism E1 is molded. This prevents a sink mark from being formed on the projection surface E11 due to the decoration and lowering the accuracy of the screen. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display an image on the screen with good accuracy.

(6-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image and a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel capable of displaying the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2). Display configured by unitizing a screen mechanism F1) and a screen casing (screen casing C10) that accommodates the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) Unit (display unit A),
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
A display area (upper display window UD1) which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable and in which the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) can be viewed is provided. Opening and closing door (upper door mechanism UD),
A perforated plate having a plurality of holes (a perforated plate B15),
The perforated plate (perforated plate B15) is arranged such that the projector (projector mechanism B2) is difficult to see through the display area (upper display window UD1), and the plurality of holes are formed in the perforated plate ( A space in which the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is housed in the screen casing (screen casing C10) with the perforated plate B15) as a boundary, and the projector (projector). A passage through which air can flow is formed between the space in which the mechanism B2) is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 in the screen casing C10 are housed by the plurality of holes formed in the perforated plate B15. A passage through which air can flow is formed between the space and the space where the projector mechanism B2 is arranged. Therefore, the space in which the screen is housed in the screen housing C10 (the area open for projecting an image) can be used for heat dissipation, so that the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 can be efficiently released. it can. Further, since the perforated plate B15 is arranged such that the projector mechanism B2 is difficult to see through the upper display window UD1 provided in the upper door mechanism UD, it is difficult for the player to see the projector mechanism B2, and the projector mechanism B2 is difficult to see. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being spoiled by the appearance of.

(6-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D) erected on the screen casing (screen casing C10), and emits light forward. It is possible to irradiate,
The gaming machine further comprises
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) arranged in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) so that light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be reflected obliquely downward and backward;
The perforated plate (perforated plate B15) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D) so as to cover the lower surface of the projector (projector mechanism B2).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the fixed screen mechanism D is erected on the screen housing C10, and the projector mechanism B2 is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D. Therefore, a relatively wide space extends below the projector mechanism B2. The perforated plate B15 is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D so as to cover the lower surface of the projector mechanism B2. Therefore, since the relatively large space can be used for heat dissipation, the heat generated in the projector mechanism B2 can be more efficiently released.

(7-1) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable,
The display unit (display unit A) is
A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2),
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting the light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2);
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). And
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are unitized,
The position of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit (display unit A) with the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) opened.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the display unit A includes the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. However, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD open. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted, and the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate. Even in this case, the projection position can be adjusted.

(7-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A). ,
The projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), and is capable of irradiating light forward.
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is arranged in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) so that the light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be reflected obliquely downward and rearward, and the main body is provided. It is possible to adjust the reflection direction of the light by changing the degree of screwing of the screw exposed toward the opening side of the portion (cabinet G).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD open, the light reflection direction (angle) is changed. Can be adjusted. As a result, the projection position can be adjusted even when the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate.

  In the above-described embodiment, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have been described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, the mirror mechanism, and the various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the gaming machine without being unitized.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to the pachi-slot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines and slot machines). ..

(8-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A projector (illumination light device B) for projecting an image,
First and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projection targets of the projector, each of which is outside the projection range of the projector, and is different from each other for each screen. A first position operable between a position (front standby position / reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) that is within the projection range of the projector and is a projection target of the projector. And a second screen,
Driving means for driving the first and second screens independently between the first position and the second position (front screen mechanism E1, reel screen drive mechanism F2, and main control Substrate MS),
Detecting whether or not the first screen is present at the first position (front standby position), detecting whether or not the first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position), And detection means (sensor mechanism CS) for detecting whether or not the second screen is present at the first position (reel standby position),
The operation range between the first position and the second position of each of the first and second screens partially includes an overlapping range that overlaps with each other, and the first and second The second position of each of the screens is in the overlapping range in the operating range,
The drive means is
When performing a return operation for returning each of the first and second screens to an origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
The first and second screens are driven according to a driving procedure of the first and second screens corresponding to the positions of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine equipped with an effect device that can perform an effect by operating a movable body (see JP 2013-013685 A). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect of production, a gaming machine equipped with a production device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed. Although the space inside the gaming machine is limited, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body. Here, when the operation ranges of the movable bodies are overlapped, when the plurality of movable bodies are simultaneously operated, the movable bodies may come into contact (interference) with each other. Usually, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, if the movable body is not operating normally, or if the movable body is manually moved while the power is cut off, etc., the movable body does not have to consider such an abnormal situation. When the is operated, the movable bodies may interfere with each other. When the movable bodies come into contact with each other, the effect device may be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection results of the detection means differ depending on the positions of the first and second screens. The first positions of the first and second screens are different from each other. Therefore, when the detection means detects that one screen is present at the first position, it does not interfere even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, by returning the other screen to the origin position first and then returning the one screen to the origin position, the returning operation can be performed without the screens interfering with each other. Further, since it is possible to dispose only one of the first screen and the second screen at the second position, the detection means detects that the first screen is present at the second position. The second screen will not be in the second position when In this case, by returning the second screen to the origin position first and then returning the first screen to the origin position, the returning operation can be performed without the screens interfering with each other. As described above, in the return operation, the first and second screens are driven in accordance with the driving procedure corresponding to the positions of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means, so that the screens interfere with each other. It is possible to return to the respective origin positions without any need. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the screens from interfering with each other by appropriately driving the first and second screens in the process after the return operation.

(8-2) The detection means (sensor mechanism CS) is
There are two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) respectively, and the corresponding screens are at the first position (front). Two first sensors for detecting whether there is a standby position / reel standby position),
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) for detecting whether or not the corresponding first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position). A second sensor,
The drive means (main control board MS) is
The first sensor detects that the first screen is in the first position, and the second sensor is the first screen is in the second position. If is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the above configuration, since the first screen does not exist at the first position and the second position at the same time, the first sensor detects that the first screen exists at the first position. If the second sensor detects that the first screen is present at the second position, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred.

(9-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A projector (illumination light device B) for projecting an image,
First and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projection targets of the projector, each of which is outside the projection range of the projector, and is different from each other for each screen. A first position operable between a position (front standby position / reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) that is within the projection range of the projector and is a projection target of the projector. And a second screen,
Driving means for driving the first and second screens independently between the first position and the second position (front screen mechanism E1, reel screen drive mechanism F2, and main control Substrate MS),
Detecting whether or not the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is present at the first position (front standby position), the first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position) A detection unit (sensor mechanism CS) for detecting whether or not the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is present at the first position (reel exposure position). ,,
The operation ranges of the first and second screens partially include overlapping ranges that overlap each other, and the second positions of the first and second screens are in the operation range. Exists in the overlapping range,
The drive means is
When performing a return operation for returning each of the first and second screens to an origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
A first condition in which the detection means detects that the first screen is present in either the first position or the second position; and When at least one of the second conditions for detecting the existence at the first position is satisfied,
Driving the first and second screens according to a driving procedure of the first and second screens corresponding to the positions of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means,
When neither of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied,
One of the first and second screens is driven so as to return to the origin position, and then the other one of the first and second screens by the detection means is The other screen is driven so as to return to the origin position according to a driving procedure according to the detection result as to whether or not the screen is present at the first position.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine equipped with an effect device that can perform an effect by operating a movable body (see JP 2013-013685 A). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect of production, a gaming machine equipped with a production device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed. Although the space inside the gaming machine is limited, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body. Here, when the operation ranges of the movable bodies are overlapped, when the plurality of movable bodies are simultaneously operated, the movable bodies may come into contact (interference) with each other. Usually, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, if the movable body is not operating normally, or if the movable body is manually moved while the power is cut off, etc., the movable body does not have to consider such an abnormal situation. When the is operated, the movable bodies may interfere with each other. When the movable bodies come into contact with each other, the effect device may be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection results of the detection means differ depending on the positions of the first and second screens. The first positions of the first and second screens are different from each other. Therefore, when the detection means detects that one screen is present at the first position, it does not interfere even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, by returning the other screen to the origin position first and then returning the one screen to the origin position, the returning operation can be performed without the screens interfering with each other. Further, since it is possible to dispose only one of the first screen and the second screen at the second position, the detection means detects that the first screen is present at the second position. The second screen will not be in the second position when In this case, by returning the second screen to the origin position first and then returning the first screen to the origin position, the returning operation can be performed without the screens interfering with each other. As described above, the detection unit detects the presence of the first screen at either the first position or the second position, and the detection unit sets the second screen to the first condition. When at least one of the second conditions for detecting the existence of the first position is satisfied, the driving procedure according to the position of each of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means is performed. By driving the first and second screens, the screens can be returned to their respective origin positions without interference.

  On the other hand, when neither of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the first screen is located between the first position and the second position, and The second screen is located at a position other than the second position. Also, in this case, the operation of one screen may cause the operation of the other screen. Therefore, according to the invention of (1), first, one screen is returned to the origin position, and then, according to the detection result of whether the other screen is present at the first position by the detection means. According to the driving procedure, the other screen is returned to the origin position. As a result, even when neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, the first and second screens can be reliably returned to the origin position.

(9-2) The detection means (sensor mechanism CS) is
There are two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) respectively, and the corresponding screens are at the first position (front). Two first sensors for detecting whether there is a standby position / reel standby position),
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) for detecting whether or not the corresponding first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position). A second sensor,
The drive means (main control board MS) is
The first sensor detects that the first screen is in the first position, and the second sensor is the first screen is in the second position. If is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the above configuration, since the first screen does not exist at the first position and the second position at the same time, the first sensor detects that the first screen exists at the first position. If the second sensor detects that the first screen is present at the second position, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred.

(10-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A projector (illumination light device B) for projecting an image,
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that is fixed at a predetermined position of the display unit and can be a projection target of the projector;
The second and third screens (the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each of which is at a first position (front standby position / reel) outside the projection range of the projector. Between a standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) that is ahead of the first screen and is a projection target of the projector instead of the first screen. Second and third screens capable of rotating around a moving axis (rotating center axis FG / rotating center axis RG);
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2) for independently driving the second and third screens between the first position and the second position; Equipped with
The operation ranges between the first position and the second position on the second and third screens partially overlap each other,
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is above the rotation axis (rotation center axis RG) of the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1). Yes,
The second screen is arranged above the first screen in the first position (front standby position) and outside the operating range of the third screen,
At the first position (reel standby position), the third screen is arranged behind the first screen and outside the operating range of the second screen.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine equipped with an effect device that can perform an effect by operating a movable body (see JP 2013-013685 A). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect of production, a gaming machine equipped with a production device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed. Since the space inside the gaming machine is finite, space saving is required in providing a plurality of movable bodies, but by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operating range of each movable body, It is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies. Here, when the operation ranges of the movable bodies are overlapped, when the plurality of movable bodies are simultaneously operated, the movable bodies may come into contact (interference) with each other. When the movable bodies come into contact with each other, the effect device may be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the second screen and the third screen are rotated about different rotation axes. This makes it possible to reduce the overlapping range in the operating range of the second screen and the operating range of the third screen. Further, the rotation axis of the second screen is arranged above the rotation axis of the third screen, and the second screen is arranged above the first screen at the first position. With this configuration, the operating range between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the third screen at the rear of the first screen in the first position, when the third screen is arranged at the first position, the third screen becomes the second screen. The possibility of contact can be eliminated. As described above, it is possible to efficiently arrange these three screens in the game machine, while reducing the possibility that the three screens contact each other.

(10-2) The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2) is
The driving of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is performed on condition that the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the first position (reel standby position),
The driving of the third screen is performed on condition that the second screen is at the first position (front standby position).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to reliably prevent the second screen and the third screen from coming into contact with each other.

  (10-3) Each of the first to third screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is a projection onto which an image emitted from the projector (illumination light device B) is projected. The surface shapes are different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the shapes of the projection surfaces of the first to third screens are different from each other, even if the same image is emitted from the projector, the image is expressed in a different mode for each screen. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production.

(10-4) The projection surface on any one screen (reel screen mechanism F1) of the first to third screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is When it is a projection target of the projector, in a side view, it is an arcuate surface that has a convex arcuate shape on the upstream side in the irradiation direction of the light emitted from the projector (irradiation light device B),
The projection surface of any one of the first to third screens (front screen mechanism E1) is a flat surface.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to express images in different modes with the screen mechanism whose projection surface is an arc surface and the screen mechanism whose projection surface is a flat surface.

(11-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A projector (illumination light device B) for projecting an image,
A movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) that can be a projection target of the projector, and a first position (front standby position) outside the projection range of the projector and a second position (front position) that is a projection target of the projector ( Movable screen that can operate between the front exposure position),
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the movable screen between the first position and the second position,
The drive mechanism is
A motor (driving motor E25),
A shaft (shaft member E3) that rotates when the motor is driven;
Two gears (intermediate gears E23, E23) provided at both ends of the shaft and rotating together with the shaft;
Two arms (crank members E22, E22) that are connected to the two gears and are rotated about a rotation axis along a predetermined direction by rotating the two gears, Two arms connected to both ends of the screen in the predetermined direction,
The movable screen is rotated between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the rotation of the two arms about the rotation axis (rotation center axis FG). .

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device that can perform an effect by rotating a movable body around an axis (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect, it has been proposed that the display unit such as a liquid crystal display device is switched between a state in which the movable unit is shielded and an open state (exposed) before and after the movable unit is rotated. There is. As a result, it is possible to create a sense of unity between the movement of the movable body and the visible state of another accessory such as the display means, and it is possible to perform a variety of effects. However, when the display means and the like (an additional character) are provided together with the movable body, there is a problem that the rotation shaft of the movable body hinders the arrangement of the display means and the like. In this respect, it is conceivable that the rotation axis of the movable body is provided above, below, or to the side of the additional matter so as not to hinder the arrangement of the different matter, but in this case, the rotation of the movable body is rotated. Since the shaft is arranged toward the end, there is a problem that the range of rotation of the movable body is limited and the size of the movable body is also restricted.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the shaft is not used as the rotating shaft of the screen (two arms). As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the shaft is increased, so that the shaft can be arranged so as not to obstruct the arrangement of the additional accessory. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the additional accessory while maintaining the rotation range and size of the screen to a desired degree. Further, each of the two arms is rotated with the rotation of two gears connected to both ends of the shaft. Therefore, with this shaft, the driving force of the motor can be evenly transmitted to each of the two arms. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driving load from being concentrated on one arm.

  (11-2) The motor (driving motor E25) is connected to one of the two gears (intermediate gears E23 and E23), and transmits a driving force to the one gear to rotate. By doing so, the shaft (shaft member E3) is rotated.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the motor is connected to the gear provided at any one end of the shaft, so that the motor does not interfere with the arrangement of another accessory (fixed screen mechanism or the like). Can be located near the end of the shaft. As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom in arranging another accessory.

(11-3) A fixed screen (fixed screen mechanism D) fixed to a predetermined position of the display unit (display unit A) and capable of being a projection target of the projector (irradiation light device B) is further provided.
When the movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the first position (front standby position), the fixed screen becomes a projection target of the projector,
When the movable screen is arranged at the second position (front exposure position), the movable screen is arranged in front of the fixed screen and is a projection target of the projector instead of the fixed screen,
The shaft (shaft member E3) is arranged rearward of the fixed screen,
The rotating shafts (rotating center shafts FG) of the two arms (crank members E22, E22) are arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the shaft is arranged behind the fixed screen as another accessory, so that the light projected on the fixed screen is not blocked by the shaft. In addition, since the rotating shafts of the two arms can be arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen, compared with the case of being arranged rearward of the rear end position of the fixed screen, the rotation axes of the movable screen and the rotating screen can be changed. It is possible to shorten the length (arm length) from the moving shaft. Therefore, even when the space inside the gaming machine is limited and the display unit cannot be upsized, the size of the movable screen can be maintained at a desired level.

(12-1) A housing (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface,
A partition plate (intermediate support plate G1) for partitioning the inside of the housing into a first space on the upper side and a second space on the lower side;
A display unit (display unit A) mounted on the partition plate and accommodated in the first space of the housing in a replaceable manner;
A relay board (relay board CK) for relaying a wiring that connects the display unit and a device housed in the second space,
The display unit (A1) is
An accommodating portion (screen housing C10) having a pair of side plates (right side plate C2 / left side plate C3) and a back plate (back plate C4),
A display means (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, a reel screen mechanism F1) that is housed in the housing portion and displays an image,
The back plate in the accommodation portion is arranged in front of the rear ends of the pair of side walls,
The relay board is arranged in a back surface (back wall G3) of the housing, and in a third space (GS) defined by the back plate and the pair of side plates in the housing.
The partition plate is formed with an opening (through hole G11) for inserting the wiring at a position facing the third space.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized and can be replaced in unit for facilitating the replacement of various parts. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case accommodating the variable display device is unitized. A gaming machine that is detachably accommodated in a body is disclosed. In the gaming machine disclosed in this publication, the inside of the housing is divided into upper and lower parts by a variable display unit mounting table, the variable display unit is attached to the upper half of the housing, and devices such as a power supply device are attached to the lower half of the housing. It is attached. Then, a relay board for relaying wiring that electrically connects the control device of the variable display unit and a device attached to the lower half of the housing is attached to the front surface of the variable display unit. By the way, if the wiring is arranged in front of the various devices in the housing, the wiring will be an obstacle in terms of appearance and operation of the various devices. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the wiring behind the various devices. However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the above publication, since the relay board is attached to the front surface of the variable display unit, the wiring between the relay board and the equipment attached to the lower half of the housing is Difficult to place behind.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the relay board is arranged in the housing in the third space behind the display unit. Further, the wiring connecting the relay board and the device housed in the second space is inserted through the opening formed at the position facing the third space in the partition plate. As a result, it becomes easy to arrange the wiring behind the various devices in the housing, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the wiring can be increased. Furthermore, since the relay board is arranged in the back surface of the housing and in the third space defined by the back plate and the pair of side plates in the accommodating portion, when the display unit is accommodated in the accommodating portion, the relay board is It is possible to prevent contact with the back surface of the housing. As a result, the possibility that the relay board will fail can be reduced.

  (12-2) The relay board (relay board CK) is disposed below the third space (space GS).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the relay board is arranged in the lower part of the third space, the wiring is connected to the relay board from the second space through the opening formed in the partition plate. It becomes easy to do.

(13-1) A display unit (display unit A),
A gaming machine having a main body housing (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface and capable of accommodating the display unit interchangeably,
The display unit is
Display means for displaying an image (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A display unit housing (housing A1) for housing the display means,
Recesses (recesses B132) are formed continuously from the front end toward the rear at both side ends of the top plate member (projector cover B1) in the display unit case, and the recesses and the main body case. Thus, a work space (space BS) for installing and fixing the main body housing in the island facility (fixing plate member OC) arranged above the main body housing is defined.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized and can be replaced in unit for facilitating the replacement of various parts. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case accommodating the variable display device is unitized. A gaming machine that is detachably accommodated in a body is disclosed. By the way, in general, gaming machines such as pachi-slot machines and pachinko machines are installed in island facilities in a gaming facility for business. When this gaming machine is installed on the island facility, the gaming machine is fixed to the island facility by driving a nail or the like from the inside of the housing to the island facility through the top plate. Here, when installing a game machine in which the unit can be replaced in the island facility as described above, the game machine is installed with the unit removed so as not to damage the unit. Is required of workers. However, in actuality, the worker dislikes the increase in the amount of work and performs the installation work of the gaming machine in a state where the unit is accommodated, which causes a problem that the unit is damaged. If the unit is damaged, it may not be possible to reuse the unit, and since it will be different from a normal gaming machine, it is not authorized as a gaming machine and business cannot be authorized. There is a risk.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the recesses are formed at both end portions of the top plate member in the display unit housing. As a result, even when the display unit is housed in the main body housing, a work space for installing and fixing the island facility is secured between the display unit and the main body housing. As a result, it is possible to install the gaming machine in the island facility while housing the display unit while preventing the display unit from being damaged.

(13-2) The top plate member (upper surface wall G4) of the main body housing (cabinet G) is formed with an opening (opening G41) penetrating in the vertical direction,
The main body housing includes a soft member (plate member G42) that is attached to the top plate member so as to close the opening and is softer than the top plate member.
The working space (space BS) is a space in which a nail extending from the soft member to the island facility (fixing plate member OC) can be driven from inside the main body housing.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to drive a nail without interfering with the display unit while the display unit is housed in the main body housing. As a result, the game machine can be securely fixed to the island facility while preventing the display unit from being damaged. Further, by driving a nail into a soft member that is softer than the top plate member of the main body housing, the game machine can be easily installed in the island facility.

(14-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that can be a projection target of a projector (illumination light device B) that projects an image;
A second screen which can be a projection target of the projector, is arranged in front of the first screen, and is a projection target of the projector instead of the first screen; A second screen (front screen mechanism E1 / reel screen mechanism F1) operable between a second position outside the projection range of
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second screen between the first position and the second position;
A casing (screen casing C10) for accommodating the first screen, the second screen, and the drive mechanism;
A relay board (relay board CK) for relaying wiring that connects the drive mechanism and a device outside the display unit,
In the case (screen case C10), at least a bottom plate (bottom plate C1), side plates (right side plate C2 / left side plate C3), and a back plate (back plate C4) are separately molded, and the bottom plate, It is configured by assembling the side plate and the back plate,
Each of the first screen, the drive mechanism, and the relay board is positioned and arranged on any one of the bottom plate, the side plate, and the back plate, and the positioned and positioned plates are mutually arranged. different.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized and can be replaced in unit for facilitating the replacement of various parts. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case accommodating the variable display device is unitized. A gaming machine that is detachably accommodated in a body is disclosed. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-183427, the unitized variable display unit is basically a unit that is commonly mounted regardless of the model of the gaming machine. Depending on the model, the production devices and the like that cannot be shared between models are not unitized. Here, if the production devices that depend on the model are manufactured separately for each model, the burden of manufacturing cost increases.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, different functional components are positioned and arranged on each plate of the housing (screen housing C10). Therefore, even if the display unit (display unit A) as a whole cannot be shared among the models, there is a possibility that the plate units of the housing can be shared among the models. As a result, it is possible to manufacture the display unit at a lower cost than when manufacturing the display unit (for each model).

  (14-2) The casing (screen casing C10) is assembled such that the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plates (right side plate C2 / left side plate C3), and the back plate (back plate C4) are replaceable. Has been.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, each plate of the housing (screen housing C10) is replaceably assembled. For this reason, the members of the display unit (display unit A) can be replaced in plate units. As a result, by exchanging the members on a plate-by-plate basis, it is possible to change the specifications of the display unit while reusing the members that are not the replacement target of the display unit.

(14-3) The bottom plate (bottom plate C1) is provided with a recess (center mounting part C11) for positioning and mounting the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D),
The drive mechanism (front screen mechanism E1 / reel screen mechanism F1) is positioned and arranged on the side plate (right side plate C2 / left side plate C3),
The relay board (relay board CK) is positioned and arranged on the back board (back board C4).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the relay board (relay board CK) that relays the wiring is positioned and arranged on the back plate (back board C4), which makes it difficult for the player to see the wiring. be able to. Further, since the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is positioned by being mounted in the recess (central mounting portion C11) formed in the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plates (right side plate C2 / left side plate C3) are positioned. ) Or the back plate (back plate C4), the first screen can be positioned in the housing by a simple method.

(14-4) The display unit (display unit A) is
A decorative member (right movable body base C5 / left) arranged between the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1 / reel screen mechanism F1). Further comprises a movable body base C6),
The bottom plate (bottom plate C1) is formed with a recess (right mounting portion C12 / left mounting portion C13) for disposing the decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, by disposing the decoration member between the drive mechanism and the second screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the drive mechanism. As a result, the aesthetics of the gaming machine can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate of the housing is formed with the recess for arranging the decoration member, the decoration member can be easily arranged in the housing.

(15-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A projector (illumination light device B) for projecting an image,
A reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) arranged in front of the projector for reflecting light emitted from the projector obliquely downward and rearward;
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that can be a projection target of the projector;
A second screen (front screen mechanism E1) which can be a projection target of the projector, which is arranged above the first screen and is outside the projection range of the projector (front standby position); A second screen that is disposed in front of the first screen and is operable between a second position (front exposure position) that is a projection target of the projector instead of the first screen,
An arm (crank member E22 / E22) having a rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) connected to the second screen;
A driving force generated from a power source (driving motor E25) is transmitted to the arm to rotate the arm around the rotation axis, thereby causing the second screen to move to the first position and the first position. A driving force transmission body (crank gear E21 / E21 / intermediate gear E23 / E23) that is operated between the second position and the second position;
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the arm is closer to the center of the second screen when the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position). Is also placed above,
The arm is connected to a position which is an upper part of the second screen when the second screen is in the first position,
When the second screen is in the second position, the second screen is inclined upward from a rear end portion far from the reflection mirror toward a front end portion close to the reflection mirror. Is configured.

  Conventionally, a game machine that displays an image projected from a projector on a screen is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to this type of gaming machine, it is possible to express an image on the same level as that of a liquid crystal display, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the size is increased as compared with the liquid crystal display. In addition, by appropriately setting the shape of the screen, it becomes possible to perform image expression that is impossible with a liquid crystal display. By the way, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of screens, including a movable screen, in a game machine in order to expand the range of image expression. In such a gaming machine, when the movable screen is to be projected by the projector, it is necessary to dispose the movable screen in front of other screens. On the other hand, when a screen other than the movable screen is to be projected by the projector, it is necessary to arrange the movable screen outside the projection range of the projector so that the projection on the other screen is not hindered. is there. However, since the space for housing the display unit is limited in the housing of the gaming machine, the display unit cannot be increased in size. Therefore, the space in which the movable screen can operate is limited, and it is difficult to increase the size of the movable screen.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the rotation axis of the arm is arranged above the center of the second screen when the second screen is at the second position, and the arm is When the second screen is in the second position, it is connected to a position that is an upper part of the second screen. Thereby, the operation range when operating between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. By thus reducing the operating range of the second screen, it is possible to increase the size of the second screen. In addition, when the second screen is in the first position, the second screen is inclined upward from the rear end portion far from the reflection mirror toward the front end portion close to the reflection mirror. Has been done. This makes it possible to shorten the vertical distance between the first screen and the second screen within a range that does not hinder the projection of the projector onto the first screen. As a result, it is possible to further increase the size of the second screen.

  The projector (illumination light device B) is arranged above the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1), and the lower surface of the projector has a front portion thereof. In addition, it has an inclined surface that inclines upward from the rear toward the front.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the lower surface of the projector has the inclined surface that inclines upward from the rear to the front, the second screen in the second position and the projector The vertical distance can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to further increase the size of the second screen.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine having a plurality of doors is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-52525). By providing a plurality of doors in this way, it is only necessary to open the corresponding doors for purposes such as replenishment of medals, adjustment of reel equipment, and repair of equipment. There is an advantage that the inside is not exposed.

However, when a plurality of doors are provided, there is a problem in that locking means for locking each of them must be provided, which complicates the unlocking work and increases the number of parts.
In addition, inside the gaming machine, there are places that are frequently accessed such as for supplying medals, and there are places that have high security such as control boards and are rarely accessed. There is also a need to adopt locking means.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing an unlocking operation and enhancing security inside the gaming machine. To do.

(16-1) One of the present inventions is an upper space having an openable upper door mechanism DU,
A lower space having a lower door mechanism DD that can be opened and closed,
An upper door lock mechanism G52 capable of locking the upper door mechanism DU,
A lower door lock mechanism G51 capable of locking the upper door mechanism DU,
Equipped with
The upper door lock mechanism G52
A cylinder G5222 provided in the upper space,
An engagement plate G5221 that is slidable in a cylinder G5222 and has claws G5221a and G5221b formed thereon,
Locked parts G511 and G521 provided on the upper door mechanism DU,
The lower door mechanism DD is
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the lower door mechanism DD interferes with the locking plate G5221 to prevent the locking plate G5221 from sliding, and the locking plate G5221 is held in the tube G5222 and the claw portion is held. When G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked portions G511 and G521 and the lower door mechanism DD is open, the interference with the locking plate G5221 of the lower door mechanism DD is released and the locking plate G5221 is slid. Thus, the gaming machine 1 is characterized in that the locking plate G5221 is provided at a position where the locking of the locked portions G511 and G521 is released.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (when the lower door mechanism DD is locked), the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the locking plate G5221 so that the locking plate G5221 slides. Stop moving. By holding the locking plate G5221 whose sliding is stopped in the cylinder G5222, the claws G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b, and the upper door mechanism DU is placed in the upper space. In contrast, it will be locked.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open (the lower door mechanism DD is unlocked), the physical interference of the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the locking plate G5221 is released, so that the locking plate G5221 is closed. It becomes slidable in the G5222, the locking of the claw portions G5221a and G5221b with respect to the locking bars G521a and G521b is released, and the locking of the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU can be released.
Accordingly, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to first perform a procedure for unlocking the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, unlocking of the lower door lock mechanism G51 is performed, and after opening the lower door mechanism DD, a procedure of unlocking the upper door lock mechanism G52 is required, and security for the upper space is required. Can be increased.
As a result, the security of the upper space can be increased more than that of the lower space, and the lower space can be a place where access can be made smoothly as compared with the upper space.

(16-2) In the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention, the lower door lock mechanism G51 is a cylinder lock G513 that can be locked / unlocked by a key,
A one-way hinge DD54, which applies a predetermined torque in the closing direction of the lower door mechanism DD, is provided between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space.
The locking portion G522 has a claw shape,
The locked portion G521 has a rod shape,
It is characterized in that the claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked by being hooked on the rod-shaped locked rods G521a and G521b.

According to the above configuration, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with the key. For the administrator of the gaming machine 1, the key has a merit that it is easy to manage because it is compact and suitable for carrying.
Further, a one-way hinge DD54 is applied between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space to apply a predetermined torque in the closing direction of the lower door mechanism DD. As a result, torque is applied when closing the lower door mechanism DD, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the lower space without applying a sudden load. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the locking plate G5221 that physically interferes with the lower door mechanism DD.
Further, sliding of the locking plate G5221 causes the claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b to be caught or released from the bar-shaped locked bars G521a and G521b. As a result, it is possible to lock the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU, which is interlocked with the sliding movement of the locking plate G5221.

(16-3) The upper door mechanism DU is rotatably supported at one end of the upper space,
The upper door lock mechanism G52 is characterized in that it is provided at the end opposite to the end supported by the shaft.

  According to the above configuration, since the upper door lock mechanism G52 is arranged on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD largely in order to unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52. .. As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the inside of the lower space to the outside, and security can be improved.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2004-24410, a gaming machine is known in which a component is divided into a plurality of units and a connecting member that connects these units is used. By thus dividing the unit into a plurality of units, it is only necessary to replace the unit when the specifications are changed or repaired, and there is an advantage that the specifications can be easily changed or repaired.

  However, if it is divided into a plurality of units and the number of units is large, it may take time and effort to assemble, replace, and disassemble.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily perform the operations when assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling the gaming machine. To do.

(17-1) One of the inventions is a cabinet G having a lower door DD1 that can be opened and closed,
It is provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1 and is provided with a plurality of reels RL, RC, RR on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and performs variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR. Reel unit RU capable of
A start lever DD6 that outputs a command signal according to an operation by a player,
It is provided on the back side of the reel unit RU, and based on the command signal output from the start lever DD6, by stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR A main control board MS for stopping and displaying
It is a gaming machine 1 characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, the lower door DD1 is provided with the reel unit RU, and further, the reel unit RU is provided with the main control board MS. In this way, by integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS, it is possible to easily perform the work when assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling the gaming machine 1.
Further, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal, but since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, it is difficult to remove. Can be configured.
The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided inside the lower door DD1. As a result, the main control board MS can be arranged on the inner side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. As a result, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if an unauthorized entry is made through the gap of the lower door DD1, the main control board MS cannot be reached. It becomes difficult and the security can be improved.

  (17-2) The present invention is characterized in that, in the gaming machine 1, the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed.

  According to the above configuration, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed, when changing the specifications of the gaming machine 1, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, the reel RL, The change of the symbols of RC and RR and the change of the game content can be collectively performed.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-65493, a cover for covering the operation plate is provided in order to prevent an illegal operation on the operation plate provided in the power supply device, and the cover is attached to the closed position. A gaming machine provided with a cover urging means for urging is known. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation on the power supply device.

  However, if the urging force of the cover urging means is increased, a strong force is required to open the cover, which may reduce the operability. Further, if the urging force of the cover urging means is weakened, a sufficient urging force may not be applied to the operation plate, which may reduce the effect of preventing unauthorized operation.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security of the power supply device without lowering the operability of the power supply device. And

(18-1) One aspect of the present invention is a cabinet G having a lower door mechanism DD that can be opened and closed,
A power supply device DE provided in the lower space,
A speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD,
Equipped with
The power supply device DE is
A power switch DE1 for selecting whether to supply power,
A switch cover DE2 that is switched by moving to an open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated and a closed state in which the power switch DE1 cannot be operated;
The speaker DD25L is
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the game machine 1 is characterized in that it has a convex portion DD25L1 that interrupts the movement path of the switch cover DE2 and restricts the switch cover DE2 from opening. ..

According to the above configuration, by closing the lower door mechanism DD, the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD interrupts the movement path of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is opened. Can be regulated. On the other hand, by opening the lower door mechanism DD, the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the switch cover DE2 cannot be operated by the power switch DE1. The closed state can be switched to the open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated.
As a result, operability of the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD opened can be ensured, and unauthorized operation on the power supply device DE can be prevented to improve security.

(18-2) In the gaming machine 1, the present invention switches the switch cover DE2 between a closed state and an open state by sliding.
The convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape,
It is characterized in that when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the switch cover DE2 is interrupted in the moving path and the switch cover DE2 is restricted from sliding and opening.

According to the above configuration, by sliding the switch cover DE2, it is possible to switch between the closed state and the open state. This makes it easy to access the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD open.
Further, since the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape, the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased, and the sound quality can be improved at the same time.

(13-1) In the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, the switch cover DE2 has an inclined surface DE2a,
The convex portion DD25L1 also has an inclined surface DD25La,
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 abuts and presses against the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is closed by sliding. It is characterized by putting it in a state.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are arranged at positions facing each other, and the switch The slide of the cover DE2 can be restricted.
On the other hand, if the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is at a position displaced from the closed state, so that the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is not covered by the switch cover DE2. The switch cover DE2 slides and moves to the closed position because the switch cover DE2 slides into contact with the inclined surface DE2a.
Thus, even if the user forgets to close the switch cover DE2 and closes the lower door mechanism DD in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 becomes the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2. Since it abuts and pushes in, the switch cover DE2 can be slid and moved to the closed position in conjunction with the operation of closing the lower door mechanism DD.

(19-1) A casing (cabinet G) having an opening (replenishment opening G31) formed on the back surface (rear surface G3) through which a supply path (medal supply port P) of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted,
A shielding member (shielding member MH1) which is formed in a flat plate shape capable of shielding the opening from the inside of the housing and which can be screwed and fixed to the back surface in a shielding state in which the opening is shielded;
A guide part that slidably guides the shielding member (shielding member MH1) from the shielding state to an open state in which the opening is exposed, and a holding portion (holding portion MH23a) that can hold the shielding member in the open state. A guide member (guide member MH2) having
Equipped with.

  Traditionally, game machines are installed on the island where the game arcade is installed. It is known that an automatic circulation supply device for supplying game media such as medals to a game machine is laid on such an installation island.

  In order to replenish the game medium from the automatic circulation replenishing device, it is general that an opening is formed on the back surface of the game machine housing. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-212282, an automatic circulation replenishing device connection opening including four arc-shaped openings whose connection is interrupted by a cutting portion is formed on the back surface of a game machine. When installing a game machine on an installation island where an automatic circulation supply device is laid, cut the cutting part and remove the inner blocking plate to form an opening on the back of the housing, and supply the automatic circulation supply device The passage can be inserted through this opening. The supply path has, for example, an outlet arranged above the hopper tank of the pachi-slot machine so that medals can be appropriately supplied to the hopper tank.

  By the way, with respect to the installed gaming machines, the location of the gaming machines is generally changed and the gaming machines are moved to different gaming halls. However, when the automatic circulation supply device is not laid on the installation island where the game machine is newly installed, in the above conventional game machine, the opening on the back surface of the housing once formed is maintained, and therefore the opening Could be used illegally. Therefore, when the gaming machine applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation supply device is installed is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation supply device is not installed, there is a problem that security is deteriorated.

  According to the above configuration, an opening through which the supply path of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted is formed on the back surface of the housing, and the opening can be shielded by the shield member. The sliding movement of the shielding member is guided by the guide member between the shielding state and the open state. Further, the shielding member can be screwed and fixed to the back surface of the housing in the shielded state, and is held by the guide member in the opened state. As a result, when the gaming machine is installed on the installation island where the automatic circulation supply device is laid, the shielding member is slid to the open state, and the supply passage of the automatic circulation supply device is inserted through the opening on the back surface. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding member from running out. Further, when the game machine is moved, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shield member and screwing and fixing the shield member in the shielded state. As a result, even if the game machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation supply device is laid, and then the game machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation supply device is not laid, the opening is shielded by the shielding member that is held. It is possible to maintain security.

(19-2) A casing (cabinet G) having an opening (replenishment opening G31) formed on the back surface (rear surface G3) through which a supply path (medal supply port P) of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted,
It is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that can shield the opening from the inside of the housing, and can be screwed and fixed to the back surface in a shielded state in which the opening is shielded, and the upper edge is perpendicular to the back surface. A shielding member (shielding member MH1) having a protruding portion (protruding portion MH12) formed thereon,
An upper edge portion (upper edge portion MH21) that is formed along the outer side of the upper edge of the shielding member in the shielding state and regulates the vertical upward movement of the shielding member, and both ends of the upper edge portion are one ends. And two side edge portions (side edge portions MH22 and MH22) formed along the side edges of the shielding member in the shielding state in a vertically downward direction from the one end, and the other ends of the two side edge portions. A guide groove (guide groove MH23b) that connects the shield members to each other and slides the shield member in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface side, and a lower edge that supports the protruding portion of the shield member on the upper surface and holds the shield member. A guide member (guide member MH2) having a portion (lower edge portion 23, holding portion MH23a),
Equipped with.

  According to the above configuration, an opening through which the supply path of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted is formed on the back surface of the housing, and the opening can be shielded by the shield member. The shield member is guided to slide between the shielded state and the open state by the guide groove formed in the lower edge portion of the guide member. Further, in the sliding of the shielding member, the upper edge portion of the guide member is restricted from moving vertically upward, and the horizontal movement is restricted by the two side edge portions and the lower edge portion. It is possible to prevent the shield member from coming off the guide member when sliding. Further, the shielding member can be screwed and fixed to the back surface of the housing in the shielded state, and is held by the guide member in the opened state. As a result, when the gaming machine is installed on the installation island where the automatic circulation supply device is laid, the shielding member is slid to the open state, and the supply passage of the automatic circulation supply device is inserted through the opening on the back surface. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding member from running out. Further, when the game machine is moved, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shield member and screwing and fixing the shield member in the shielded state. As a result, even if the game machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation supply device is laid, and then the game machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation supply device is not laid, the opening is shielded by the shielding member that is held. It is possible to maintain security.

(19-3) The protruding portion of the shielding member protrudes more than the lower edge portion that holds the shielding member.

  According to the above configuration, the protruding portion can be easily grasped, and the open state can be easily transitioned to the shielded state.

  Conventionally, in order to prevent medals from overflowing from the hopper device or the auxiliary storage, a medal overflow preventing member such as a guide member is provided, and medals flowing from the selector to the hopper device and the auxiliary storage from the hopper device are provided. There is known a gaming machine that prevents a medal flowing into the hopper from overflowing from the hopper device and the auxiliary storage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-188397). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a problem in which overflowing medals accumulate inside the gaming machine and interfere with other electronic devices and movable members.

  However, in recent years, there is a new flow of medals other than the above-described flow of medals such as automatic supply of medals from the outside, and measures against these new medals flow are required.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing medals from overflowing from a hopper device or the like even when replenishing medals from the outside. The purpose is to

(20-1) One of the present inventions is a cabinet G,
A medal supply mechanism MH provided on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G for receiving a thin metal medal into the cabinet G;
A hopper mechanism HP having a bucket HP1 for storing medals received from the medal supply mechanism MH;
A coin placed below the medal supply mechanism MH and hung from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G to the bucket HP1 so as to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Guard HP30,
It is a gaming machine 1 characterized by having.

  According to the above configuration, since the coin guard HP30 is provided so as to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, the medals received from the medal supply mechanism MH are Even if it is about to overflow from HP1, it can be prevented from entering the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overflow of medals from being accumulated in the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfering with other electronic devices and movable members.

(20-2) The present invention is provided with an overflow bucket OF, which is provided at a predetermined distance from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G in the gaming machine 1, and stores medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP,
The coin guard HP30 includes an L-shaped first guard portion HP301 provided from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G to the bucket HP1 and a second guard portion HP302 provided from the overflow bucket OF to the bucket HP1. It is characterized in that it is formed in a shape and is inclined so as to fall toward the bucket HP1 side.

According to the above configuration, the coin guard HP30 can be arranged between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1. This can prevent medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1.
Further, even when a coin is put on the coin guard HP30, the medal is inclined toward the bucket HP1 side, so that the medal slides down toward the bucket HP1 side due to its own weight, and the medal can be normally stored in the hopper mechanism HP. ..

  Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-20154, a connector provided behind a hopper is mounted on a housing as a hopper (coin payout device) capable of accommodating a plurality of coins is slidly installed inside the housing. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that can be electrically connected to a connector provided inside the body is known. According to such a gaming machine, physical installation in the housing of the hopper and electrical connection can be performed at the same time, so that work efficiency of installation, replacement, and inspection of the hopper can be improved.

  However, when the hopper is slid inside the housing, if the hopper is slid at a misaligned position, the connector provided behind the hopper may contact the back plate of the housing and be damaged. There is.

  In this regard, in JP 2012-20154 A, a guide rail for guiding the sliding of the hopper is provided, but when the slide installation of the hopper is hurried, the slide is installed without being properly guided by the guide portion. In some cases, the guide part alone cannot sufficiently protect the connector.

  Then, this invention is made | formed in view of the above problems, and an object of this invention is to provide the gaming machine which can normally slide-install a hopper inside a housing | casing.

(21-1) The present invention is the gaming machine 1 in which the connector G81 provided on the back side of the cabinet G is connected to the connector HP41 provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP.
A pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP,
It is provided on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G and has upper parts HG121 / HG131 and lower parts HG123 / HG133, and a pair of guide pieces HP21 / HP22 is sandwiched between the upper part HG121 / HG131 and the lower parts HG123 / HG133. A pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 that can guide the hopper mechanism HP slidably in the depth direction of the cabinet G in the state of being engaged with,
Protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and on the front side of the connector HP41,
It is a gaming machine 1 having.

According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is slid on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP are located above the guide rails HG12 and HG13. When the guide piece HP21 / HP22 is not sandwiched between the HG121 / HG131 and the lower part HG123 / HG133 and is accidentally slid and slid above the upper part HG121 / HG131 of the guide rail HG12 / HG13, the guide piece HP21 / HP22 is moved to the guide rail. By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the HG12 and HG13, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid at the wrong position. That is, it becomes possible to normally slide the hopper mechanism HP inside the cabinet G.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from slidingly installed at the wrong position, the hopper mechanism HP coming into contact with the connector G81, and the connector G81 from being damaged.

  (21-2) The present invention is a gaming machine characterized in that a portion of the upper portions HG121, HG131 of the guide rails HG12, HG13 arranged in front of the cabinet G is tapered.

  According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is engaged with the guide rails HG12 and HG13, it is possible to prevent the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 from coming into contact with the hopper mechanism HP.

  (21-3) In the present invention, the lower portions HG123 / HG133, the upper portions HG121 / HG131, and the protruding portions HG124 / HG134 of the pair of guide rails HG12 / HG13 are integrally formed by bending a single plate. It is a game machine characterized by.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to form the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 at the lower portions HG123 and HG133, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 by a single plate. As a result, the manufacturing process can be simplified.

  (21-4) Since the protrusions HG124 and HG134 are located on the far side of the cabinet G, when the hopper mechanism HP is temporarily placed around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparatory step for engaging the guide rails HG12 and HG13. Can be out of the way.

  (21-5) Since the planar space HG17 is provided in front of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP are provided in the planar space HG17. As a preparatory step before engaging with the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed. This allows the hopper mechanism HP to be slidably installed on the bottom of the cabinet G in an effortless manner.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a control board for controlling lottery and effects associated with a game is arranged in an upper part of a housing, and a hopper device for handling medals is arranged in a lower part of the housing (JP-A-2013-188395). Publication). According to such a gaming machine, since there is a distance between the control board and the hopper device, the medals are prevented from physically contacting the control board, and the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between medals is also provided. Can be made smaller.

  However, in recent years, in order to simplify parts replacement and recycling, operating devices, rendering devices, and the like are often unitized and arranged on the upper part of the housing. Then, for the convenience of the design, the control board may be arranged in the lower part of the housing, and the distance between the control board and the hopper device may become short.

  As a result, since the distance between the control board and the hopper device becomes short, the medals may physically contact the control board, or the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between the medals may increase.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and the medal physically contacts the control board even when the distance between the control board and the hopper device is short. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the above and reducing the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between medals.

(22-1) One of the present inventions is a cabinet G having an upper space and a lower space,
A display unit A provided in the upper space,
A sub-control device SS that is arranged on the inner side of the lower space and controls the game-related control,
A hopper mechanism HP which is arranged in the lower space in front of the sub-control device SS and stores metal medals;
A sheet metal BK provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP,
Equipped with
The sub control device SS is the gaming machine 1 characterized by being sandwiched between the back wall G3 of the lower space and the sheet metal BK.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal flows into the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub-control device SS side, the sheet metal BK. Thus, it is possible to prevent the medal from physically contacting the sub control device SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the sheet metal BK can also prevent the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP.
Further, since the sub-control device SS is provided on the inner side of the lower space and is sandwiched by the back wall G3 of the lower space and the sheet metal BK, the sub-control device SS does not remove the sheet metal BK from the cabinet G. It cannot be removed. This improves the security of the sub control device SS.

  (22-2) Since the sheet metal BK is connected to the metal frame of the gaming machine 1, the radiation caused by the contact of the medal with the sheet metal BK and the radiation caused by the contact between the metal medals caused by the dropping of the medals, It can be grounded via a metal frame.

  Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-12239, a button unit provided with an elastically deformable locking portion on the side surface so that it can be attached from the front side to the opening of the front door, A gaming machine is known in which a button unit is provided with a flange portion larger than the opening in order to fill a gap between the button unit and the opening. In such a gaming machine, the button unit can be easily fitted into the opening from the front side by utilizing the elastic deformation of the locking portion. Further, since the flange portion fills the gap between the button unit and the opening, it is possible to prevent illegal acts such as removing the button unit by inserting a wire or the like from the gap and elastically deforming the locking portion.

  However, the button unit may not be sufficiently fixed to the front door only by elastically deforming and fixing the locking portion to the back of the front door. In addition, the flange portion is exposed to the outside (front door), which may impair the appearance.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which a button can be firmly fixed to a housing.

(23-1) One of the present inventions is a cabinet G,
A second pedestal DD2b provided in the cabinet G and a maximum BET button DD8 attached through an opening DD2ba formed in the second pedestal DD2b,
Equipped with
The maximum BET button DD8 is
An operating portion DD81 which is arranged outside the cabinet G with respect to the opening portion DD2ba, has communication holes DD816a and DD816b and screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b, and has a flange DD8111 which is larger than the opening portion DD2ba,
A locking portion DD82 which is arranged on the inner side of the cabinet G with respect to the opening portion DD2ba, has communication holes DD826a and DD826b, and has a flange DD823 larger than the opening portion DD2ba,
The gaming machine 1 is characterized by including the communication holes DD826a and DD826b, the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, and the screws DD83a and DD83b that communicate with and screw into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b.

  According to the above configuration, the operation portion DD81 and the locking portion DD82 are opened by the screws DD83a and DD83b that communicate with and screw the communication holes DD826a and DD826b, the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, and the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b. It can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b via the portion DD2ba. Further, since the operation portion DD81 has a shape portion larger than the opening portion DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from falling from the outside of the opening portion DD2ba to the inside of the cabinet G. Further, since the locking portion DD82 also has the flange DD823 larger than the opening portion DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from coming out of the cabinet G from the inside of the opening portion DD2ba. Thereby, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b.

(23-2) In the gaming machine 1, the operation unit DD81 is (23-2)
Button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b,
A first member DD812 slidable through the through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing;
A spring DD813 for returning the DD812 pushed in by pressing to the initial position,
Have
The shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811 are the same.

According to the above configuration, since the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811 are the same, when the first member DD812 is viewed from above, the button base DD811 is moved by the first member DD812. Only the first member DD812, which is hidden and is pressed by the player, can be shown to the outside. Thereby, the external appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified and the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be improved in design.
Further, since the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811 are the same, the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 is smaller than the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811. It is possible to provide a structure in which it is easy to prevent unauthorized entry from the gap between the through holes DD811a and DD811b included in the base DD811.

(24-1) A symbol display means (reel device) that includes reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and can perform variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels. RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player,
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to change display of the symbols arranged on the reel (variable control means MS, drive) Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Stop command means (stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player,
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reels by stopping the rotation of the reels based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation;
A detection piece (detection piece RU1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference (circumference RUD) as the reel rotates;
A sensor (sensor unit RU112) whose detection position is one point on the circumference (detection point RUP);
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached the reference position based on the detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
Equipped with
The reference position specifying means sets the position of the reel at the time of detecting that the detection piece has changed from the undetected state to the detected state as the first reference position, and the detection piece is detected. The position of the reel when the change from the state to the undetected state is detected is the second reference position,
The detection piece is continuously detected by the sensor until the reel position reaches the second reference position after reaching the first reference position.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface and a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that a player operates a start lever, and a plurality of reels are detected. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch that requests the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal that requests the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. Stop switch and a motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting each driving force to each reel, and controlling the operation of the motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. , And a reel control unit for rotating and stopping each reel, and when it detects that the start lever is operated, Known as a pachislot machine, which performs lottery based on the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing at which it is detected that the stop button has been operated and the reel rotation is stopped. Has been.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine using a stepping motor as a motor for driving rotation of a reel (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-263284). In such a gaming machine, a detection piece (reel index) is provided at a specific position of the reel, and the position of the reel can be calculated based on the number of times the pulse is output, based on the detection of the reel index. .. By calculating the position of the reel using such a method, it is not necessary to provide the number of detection pieces corresponding to the symbols, and the cost can be reduced.

  However, the position of the reel calculated while the detection piece is not detected is a theoretical position obtained based on the number of times the pulse is output, and when an irregularity such as stopping the reel with bare hands occurs, etc. , The actual reel position may not always match.

  According to the above configuration, the detection piece that rotates along the predetermined circumference along with the rotation of the reel is continuously detected by the sensor whose detection position is one point on the circumference. Then, the first reference position is specified by detecting that the detection piece has changed from the undetected state to the detected state (so-called on-edge), and the detection piece has been detected from the detected state. The second reference position is specified by detecting the change to the non-existence state (so-called off edge). Therefore, during one rotation of the reel, the detection can be performed twice, when the reel position becomes the first reference position and when the reel position becomes the second reference position. As described above, since the detection is performed twice while the reel makes one rotation, the time until the stop operation becomes effective after the rotation speed of the reel theoretically reaches the specified speed (after the acceleration process is completed). Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of not being able to press once due to the relationship between the position of the pattern to be pressed and the position of the detection piece. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling inconvenience during the stop operation.

(24-2) The first reference position and the second reference position are arranged to face each other on a straight line passing through the central axis of the reel with the central axis interposed therebetween.
The detection piece includes a region on the circumferential path that extends from a position corresponding to the first reference position to a position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path, and the second reference position. Has a shape that does not include a region extending from the position corresponding to to the position corresponding to the first reference position along the circumferential path.

  According to the above configuration, even if only one sensor is provided, it is possible to detect twice during one rotation of the reel, and the same effect as when two sensors are provided can be obtained. Be done. That is, without increasing the number of sensors, it is possible to reduce the possibility that one-round pressing cannot be performed due to the relationship between the position of the pattern to be pressed and the position of the detection piece.

(25-1) A plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of kinds of symbols are arranged, and a symbol display means (reel) capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels Device RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player,
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to change display of the symbols arranged on the reel (variable control means MS, drive) Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Stop command means (stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player,
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reels by stopping the rotation of the reels based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Illumination means (backlight RR4 etc.) for illuminating from behind the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol display means,
A support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reel is arranged between two adjacent reels of the plurality of reels,
The front portion of the support plate is formed in a generally arcuate shape in side view.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface and a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that a player operates a start lever, and a plurality of reels are detected. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch that requests the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal that requests the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. Stop switch and a stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting each driving force to each reel, and the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates each reel and stops it. When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing when the operation of the stop button is detected. The so-called gaming machine is known.

  As such a conventional game machine, there is known a game machine provided with a back lamp for illuminating a symbol from the inside of the reel (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-178268). According to such a gaming machine, when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the symbols constituting the symbol combination are highlighted and the effect itself can be given to the symbol itself.

  However, in general, in a gaming machine, since a plurality of reels are provided laterally adjacent to each other, the lights of the back lamps that irradiate the adjacent reels interfere with each other, resulting in a good effect. There was a problem that I could not expect.

  According to the above configuration, the support plate that supports the reels is arranged between the two adjacent reels, and the front portion of the support plate is formed in a substantially arcuate shape in side view. Therefore, since the supporting plate has a shape protruding forward as compared with a supporting plate having a rectangular shape in a side view, the supporting plate has a function as a partition plate, thereby illuminating one reel. It is possible to prevent light from reaching the adjacent reels. Moreover, the function as a partition plate is not simply imparted by enlarging the size of the support plate, but such a function is imparted by forming the front portion of the support plate in a side view substantially arcuate shape. Therefore, the support plate is not conspicuous to the player's appearance, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being spoiled.

  The support plate has a front portion having a substantially arcuate shape in a side view and a rear portion having a shape continuously formed rearward from both ends of an arc defining the arcuate shape in a side view (for example, a substantially rectangular shape in a side view). And a part. The bow shape is a figure surrounded by a circular arc and a string connecting the ends of the circular arc.

  Further, the support plate may directly support the reel, or may indirectly support the reel via another member. For example, the support plate may be a motor mounting plate for mounting a motor (stepping motor) that rotationally drives the reel.

(25-2) A plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of kinds of symbols are arranged, and a symbol display means (reel) capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels Device RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player,
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to change display of the symbols arranged on the reel (variable control means MS, drive) Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Stop command means (stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player,
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reels by stopping the rotation of the reels based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Illumination means (backlight RR4 etc.) for illuminating from behind the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol display means,
A support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reel is arranged between two adjacent reels of the plurality of reels,
The front portion of the support plate is formed to have substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view.

  According to the above configuration, the support plate that supports the reel is disposed between the two adjacent reels, and the front portion of the support plate is formed to have substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view. Therefore, since the supporting plate has a shape protruding forward as compared with a supporting plate having a rectangular shape in a side view, the supporting plate has a function as a partition plate, thereby illuminating one reel. It is possible to prevent light from reaching the adjacent reels. Moreover, the function as a partition plate is not added simply by enlarging the size of the support plate, but such a function is added by forming the front portion of the support plate in the side view in substantially the same shape as the reel. Therefore, the support plate is not conspicuous to the player's appearance, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being spoiled.

  The front portion of the support plate, which is formed to have substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view, has substantially the same size as the portion of the reel that faces the reel, and it is desirable that the both portions overlap each other. That is, when viewed from one side surface, the front portion of the support plate is almost completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side surface, the portion of the reel facing the front portion of the support plate is substantially covered. Complete coverage is desirable. As a result, it is possible to achieve a good balance between giving the function as a partition plate to the support plate and maintaining the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

  For example, the support plate is formed continuously from a substantially semicircular front portion that overlaps the front half of the reel in a side view, and from both ends of an arc defining the semicircle in a rear view toward the rear. It may be configured by a rear portion having a shape (for example, a substantially rectangular shape in a side view).

(26-1) A symbol display means (reel device) that includes reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged and that can perform variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels. RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player,
When the start command signal output from the start command unit is detected, the reel is rotated to change the display of the symbols arranged on the reel. The fluctuation control unit (main control board MS, drive) Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Stop command means (stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player,
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reels by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation;
A detection piece (detection piece RU1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference as the reel rotates;
A sensor (sensor RU1121) for detecting the detection piece,
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached the reference position based on the detection of the detection piece by the sensor,
Equipped with
The sensor is attached to a motor mounting plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for mounting a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a base member (base member RU1122),
The motor mounting plate has a screw insertion portion (screw hole RU11c, screw hole RU11d) into which a screw (screw RU1124a / RU1124b) for fastening the pedestal member to the motor mounting plate can be inserted. Two locations on the second straight line (straight line RUDB) that are provided at two predetermined locations and that are substantially perpendicular to the first straight line (straight line RUDA) connecting the first predetermined location and the second predetermined location. Positioning insertion portions (fitting holes RU11e, RU11f) are provided at third predetermined locations and fourth predetermined locations that are located on opposite sides of the first straight line.
The pedestal member is provided with positioning protrusions (projections RU1122j and RU1122k) that can be fitted into the positioning insertion portions provided at the two locations.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface and a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that a player operates a start lever, and a plurality of reels are detected. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch that requests the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal that requests the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. Stop switch and a stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting each driving force to each reel, and the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates each reel and stops it. When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing when the operation of the stop button is detected. The so-called gaming machine is known.

  In such a gaming machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor whose detection position is one point on this rotation path. Then, the position where the reel index is detected is set as the reference position of the reel, and the position of the reel is calculated based on this reference position and the number of excitation steps of the stepping motor.

  By the way, the conventional sensor for detecting a reel index is generally arranged on a motor mounting plate for mounting a reel motor via a pedestal member. As a result, the sensor is arranged near the rotation path of the reel index. However, if the pedestal member is not accurately positioned on the motor mounting plate, erroneous determination of the game result determined based on the reel stop position or damage to the gaming machine due to contact between the sensor and the reel index occurs. There was a risk that

  According to the above configuration, when the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member are mounted, the positioning protrusions of the pedestal member are fitted into the positioning insertion portions of the third and fourth predetermined locations of the motor mounting plate, whereby the motor The pedestal member can be positioned with respect to the mounting plate, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member are fixed by screwing. The position of the pedestal member with respect to the motor mounting plate is restricted at four places, that is, two screw insertion portions and two positioning insertion portions, and further, a first straight line connecting the two screw insertion portions and two positioning insertion portions. Is set to be perpendicular to the second straight line connecting the two. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the pedestal member from being displaced with respect to the motor mounting plate. Further, the screwing is only at two places of the two screw insertion portions, so that the mounting work can be simplified. As a result, the pedestal member can be attached to the motor mounting plate easily and accurately, and erroneous determination of the game result and damage to the gaming machine can be prevented.

(26-2) The positioning insertion portion provided at one of the third predetermined location and the fourth predetermined location is formed in an elongated hole shape in which the second linear direction is the longitudinal direction. ..

  According to the above configuration, one of the two positioning insertion portions arranged on the second straight line is formed in the shape of an elongated hole whose second linear direction is the longitudinal direction. Accordingly, it is possible to allow an error in the spacing when molding the two positioning protrusions on the pedestal member.

  The longitudinal direction of the positioning insertion portion is substantially perpendicular to the tangential direction of rotation of the detection piece at the detection position of the sensor.

  According to the above configuration, even if the fitting hole having the longitudinal direction is displaced from the base member, it is possible to prevent the sensor from erroneously detecting the reel reference position.

(27-1) A symbol display means (reel device) that includes reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and that can perform variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reels. RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player,
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to change display of the symbols arranged on the reel (variable control means MS, drive) Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.,
Stop command means (stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player,
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reels by stopping the rotation of the reels based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.),
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation;
A detection piece that rotates along a predetermined circumference along with the rotation of the reel,
A sensor (sensor RU1121) for detecting the detection piece,
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached the reference position based on the detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
Equipped with
The reel position specifying means,
The sensor is attached to a motor attachment plate (motor attachment plate RU11) for attaching a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a base member (base member RU1122),
The pedestal member has a screw insertion portion (screw hole RU1122c, screw hole RU1122d) into which a screw (screw RU1123a / RU1123b) for fastening the sensor to the pedestal member can be inserted. And a second straight line (straight line RUDD) that is substantially perpendicular to a first straight line (straight line RUDC) connecting the first predetermined position and the second predetermined position. Positioning protrusions (protrusions RU1122e and RU1122f) are provided at third and fourth predetermined locations located on the side where the sensor detects the detection piece with respect to the first straight line,
The sensor is provided with positioning insertion portions (fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f) into which the positioning protrusions provided at the two locations can be inserted.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface and a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that a player operates a start lever, and a plurality of reels are detected. The start switch that requests the start of the rotation of the player and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are detected by the player, and a signal that requests the rotation of the corresponding reel is output. Stop switch and a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates each reel and stops it. When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing when the operation of the stop button is detected. The so-called gaming machine is known.

  In such a gaming machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor whose detection position is one point on this rotation path. Then, the position where the reel index is detected is set as the reference position of the reel, and the position of the reel is calculated based on this reference position and the number of excitation steps of the stepping motor.

  By the way, the conventional sensor for detecting a reel index is generally arranged on a motor mounting plate for mounting a reel motor via a pedestal member. As a result, the sensor is arranged near the rotation path of the reel index. However, if the sensor is not accurately positioned on the pedestal member, the game machine may be damaged due to erroneous determination of the game result determined based on the reel stop position or contact between the sensor and the reel index. was there.

  According to the above configuration, when the pedestal member and the sensor are attached, the positioning protrusions at the third predetermined location and the fourth predetermined location of the pedestal member are fitted into the positioning insertion portion of the sensor, whereby Positioning can be performed, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the pedestal member and the sensor are screwed and fixed. The position of the sensor with respect to the pedestal member is regulated at four positions of two screw insertion portions and two positioning protrusions, and further connects a first straight line connecting the two screw insertion portions and two positioning insertion portions. It is set to be perpendicular to the second straight line. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the sensor from being displaced with respect to the base member. Furthermore, since the screwing is only at two places of the two screw insertion portions, the mounting work can be simplified. As a result, the sensor can be attached to the pedestal member easily and accurately, and it is possible to prevent erroneous determination of the game result and damage to the gaming machine.

(27-2)
The screw insertion portion provided at one of the first predetermined location and the second predetermined location is formed in an elongated hole shape whose longitudinal direction is the first linear direction.

  According to the above configuration, one of the two screw insertion portions arranged on the first straight line is formed in the shape of an elongated hole having the first straight line direction as the longitudinal direction. As a result, it is possible to allow an error in the gap in forming the two screw fastening points in the sensor.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-245279, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a locking member that is attached after the button unit is mounted and that prevents unauthorized removal of the button unit. According to such a gaming machine, by attaching the locking member to the existing button unit, it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the button unit without changing the existing button unit.

  However, in order to prevent unauthorized removal of the button unit, attaching a new additional component requires securing a storage space for the additional component in the gaming machine, which may not be easy to apply. ..

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing unauthorized removal of a button unit while suppressing an increase in the size of parts. To do.

(28-1) One of the present inventions is a button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b,
A first member DD812 slidable through the through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing;
A spring DD813 for returning the first member DD812 pushed in by pressing to the initial position,
A photo sensor DD814 having a light emitting portion DD814a and a light receiving portion DD814b;
A second member DD815 having a light blocking piece DD8151 for blocking between the light emitting portion DD814a and the light receiving portion DD814b of the photo sensor DD814;
Equipped with a maximum BET button DD8 with
The second member DD815 is
It has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b,
The gaming machine 1 is characterized in that it is attached to a portion of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and is attached to a part of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. Has been. As a result, the second member DD815 can prevent the first member DD812 from coming off from the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and can prevent unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD8.
Moreover, since other members are not used, it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the component.

(28-2) In the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, the button base DD811 has two through holes DD811a and DD811b formed therein.
The first member DD812 has two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b capable of sliding through the two through holes DD811a and DD811b,
The second member DD815 is attached so as to connect between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b, and the light-shielding piece DD8151 passes through the two through holes of the second member DD815. It is characterized in that it is provided in an intermediate portion between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the holes DD811a and DD811b.

  According to the above configuration, the light blocking piece DD8151 interlocks with the pressing of the first member DD812 by the player, and the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b slide through the two through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811. A light-shielding piece DD8151 provided at an intermediate portion of the second member DD815 attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b includes a light-emitting portion DD814a and a light-receiving portion DD814b. It can be cut across.

  (28-3) Since the first member DD812 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b, the first member DD812 is prevented from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b toward the second member DD815. , It is possible to further prevent unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD8.

  BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-44199, there is known a gaming machine in which a front door is separated into an upper door and a lower door, each of which can be opened and closed. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to open and close only a necessary portion when supplying medals (opening and closing the lower door), adjusting mechanical reels (opening and closing the upper door), etc. It is possible to prevent exposure to (improvement of security).

  By the way, in recent years, in order to simplify parts of game machines, recycling, and the like, unitization of operation devices, effect devices, and the like has been performed.

  Here, for example, a united effect device is stored in a space on the side of the housing corresponding to the upper door. By doing so, it is possible to easily change the production device when changing the model or recycling.

  However, when the unitized production device is large, the upper door (or the lower door) may be an obstacle when changing models or recycling.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a device housed inside a gaming machine can be smoothly taken in and out.

(29-1) One of the present invention is
The cabinet G has shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and engagement recesses UH23 and UH24,
The upper door mechanism DU that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet G is
Bearing portions UH121 and UH131 rotatably superposed on the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and slidable with respect to the axis line UH121A of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22;
Until the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, the upper door mechanism DU engages with the engaging recesses UH23 and UH24 and restricts the sliding of the bearing portions UH121 and UH131, and the upper door mechanism DU with respect to the cabinet G. Engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 that are disengaged from the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 when opened by a predetermined angle or more,
It is a gaming machine 1 characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, the engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 engage with the engaging recesses UH23 and UH24 until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, and the bearings UH121 and UH131 serve as shafts. The sliding of the parts UH21 and UH22 along the axis line UH121A is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the superposition of the shaft portions UH21 / UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 / UH131 from being released, and to lock the upper door mechanism DU from being removed from the cabinet G.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened with respect to the cabinet G by a predetermined angle or more, the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 are disengaged from the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are replaced by the shaft portion UH21. -It becomes slidable along the axis line UH121A of UH22. As a result, the superposition of the shaft portions UH21 / UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 / UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.

  (29-2) In the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention, when the upper door mechanism DU is a closed state when it is closed with respect to the cabinet G, and an open state when it is opened with 90 ° with respect to the cabinet G. The predetermined angle is larger than the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the closed state and smaller than 90 ° which is the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the open state.

  According to the above configuration, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (opening at 90 °).

(30-1) A door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing,
A left-end light emitting mechanism that is arranged at the left end of the door and guides light to the left end region of the door to emit light.
A right end light emitting mechanism which is arranged at the right end portion of the door and guides light to the right end region of the door to emit light.
A central light emitting substrate arranged in the central portion of the door for emitting light,
The light guide mechanism guides the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate to at least one of a left peripheral region on the left end region side and a right peripheral region on the right end region side.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-178268). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect. Generally, game machines are installed side by side on installation islands in a game arcade, so there is a limit to the size of the game machine. However, in the case where a plurality of rendering devices are provided, there is a possibility that a space for a configuration including a reflection plate and a translucent plate for producing light with conventional LEDs cannot be sufficiently provided. According to the above configuration, by guiding the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate to at least one of the left peripheral region and the left peripheral region by the light guide mechanism, it is difficult to guide the light by the left edge light emitting mechanism or the right edge light emitting mechanism. Even in the region, light can be emitted. With this, even with a door having a limited space, it is possible to produce lights at a plurality of places with a higher effect.

(30-2) The central light emitting substrate is provided with an upper light source and a lower light source on an upper surface and a lower surface, respectively.
An upper light guide mechanism that guides light from the upper light source to a position separated from the central portion, and a lower light guide mechanism that guides light from the lower light source to a position separated from the central portion. Have.

  According to the above configuration, the upper light source on the upper surface and the lower light source on the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate can be used to emit light in the left peripheral region and the right peripheral region by the upper light guiding mechanism and the lower light guiding mechanism. The left peripheral area and the right peripheral area can be expanded to a wider area or place. With this, even with a door having a limited space, it is possible to produce lights at a plurality of places with a higher effect.

(30-3) A door (upper door mechanism UD) capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing,
A left end light emitting mechanism HA2 which is arranged at the left end of the door and which makes the left end region of the door emit light in a planar manner;
A right end light emitting mechanism HA3 which is arranged at the right end portion of the door and which makes the right end region of the door emit light planarly;
A central light emitting mechanism HA4 arranged in the central portion of the door,
The central light emitting mechanism,
A central light emitting substrate (LED substrate HA411 in the top lens) provided with an upper light source and a lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively;
An upper light guide mechanism (left light guide lens HA413, right light guide lens HA414) provided on the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate to guide light from the upper light source to the upper light guide region to emit light in a planar manner.
A lower light guide mechanism (right downlight lens HA415, left downlight lens) that guides light from the lower light source, which is provided on the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate, to a lower light guide region to emit light in a planar manner. Have and.

  According to the above configuration, the central light-emitting substrate of the central light-emitting mechanism has an upper light source and a lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively, and these light sources are provided by the upper light guiding mechanism and the lower light guiding mechanism, respectively. The lower light guide region is made to emit light in a planar manner. Accordingly, in addition to the left end region by the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end region by the right end light emitting mechanism, it is possible to emit light from the upper light guiding region and the lower light guiding region by one central light emitting mechanism. Even with a door, it is possible to produce lights at a plurality of locations with a higher effect.

(30-4) The upper light guide mechanism and the lower light guide mechanism are arranged symmetrically with respect to the central light emitting substrate.

  According to the above configuration, the upper light guide region and the lower light guide region are present symmetrically with respect to the central light emitting substrate, so even if the door has a limited space, it is possible to produce light at a plurality of locations. , Can be performed with a higher effect.

(30-5) The upper light guide mechanism includes an upper reflector (reflector HA412 in the top lens, LED substrate concealing member HA16 in the top lens) that covers the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate and the upper light source, the upper reflector and the center. The upper light guide lens (left light guide lens HA413, right light guide lens HA414), which is respectively arranged on the right side and the left side of the gap with the light emitting substrate and is arranged up to the upper light guide region,
The lower light guide mechanism includes a lower reflector that covers the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate and the lower light source, the lower reflector (reflector HA412 in the top lens, LED substrate concealing member HA16 in the top lens), and the central light emission. It has a lower light guide lens ((right downlight lens HA415, left downlight lens)) which is arranged on the side of the gap with the substrate and is arranged up to the lower light guide region.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to produce light at a plurality of locations with a simple configuration including the reflector and the light guide lens.

(30-6) The upper light guide mechanism is arranged so as to emit light from the left end region and the right end region of the door toward the center as the upper light guide region.
The lower light guide mechanism is arranged so as to emit light from each area above the upper speaker arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door as a lower light guide area.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to cause the upper light guide mechanism and the lower light guide mechanism to emit light in a region that cannot be sufficiently emitted by the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end light emitting mechanism.

(31-1) Gaming machine having a rendering device (screen mechanism D) disposed in the center of the front surface of the casing (casing 2) and a light emitting unit (left panel mechanism HJ) disposed laterally of the rendering device And
The light emitting unit,
A light source device (left LED substrate HJ1) capable of irradiating the front side and the rear side of the housing with light;
A partitioning member (partitioning mechanism HJ2) that splits the light toward the front surface side into two and guides the light that is split into one to the one side surface direction of the housing;
A side surface transmissive member (upper left side surface lens HJ3) which constitutes a part of one side surface of the housing and transmits the light divided by the partition member into the one side;
A front light-transmitting member (lower left lens HJ) that constitutes a part of the front surface of the housing and transmits the light divided into the other by the partition member;
An inner light guide member (inner light guide member HJ5) that guides light toward the rear surface side in a direction in which the effect device is arranged;
Have.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine equipped with an effect device that can perform an effect by operating a movable body (see Patent Document 1). According to such a gaming machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect.

  In general, game machines are installed side by side on installation islands in a game arcade, so the size of the game machine is limited. However, when a plurality of rendering devices and a rendering device that occupies a large space are provided, there is a possibility that sufficient space cannot be provided for a configuration including a reflection plate and a translucent plate for rendering the light with conventional LEDs. there were.

  According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the light source device to the front surface side of the housing is divided into two, one of which is guided in one side surface direction of the housing by the partition member and is transmitted from the side surface translucent member, The other is transmitted from the front light-transmitting member. Further, the light emitted from the light source device to the rear surface side of the housing is guided to the effect device side by the light guide member. This makes it possible not only to realize effect light from the front and side surfaces of the gaming machine housing but also to irradiate light to the effect device side by only providing the light emitting unit on the side surface side. As a result, it is possible to save space in the configuration related to the effect light in the game machine, and it is possible to allow enlargement of the effect device.

(31-2) The inner light guide member is
A light-transmissive member (left light guide plate HJ51) that is capable of transmitting light and that is incident on the rear surface side of the light source device and that is disposed from the incident position to the peripheral edge of the front surface of the rendering device;
A reflecting member (left LED substrate cover HJ52) arranged so as to be engaged with the back side of the translucent member;
Have
The transparent member,
A projecting portion (projection portion HJ511a) having a shape projecting toward the light source device, disposed in the light traveling direction toward the rear surface of the light source device, and into which light traveling toward the rear surface of the light source device is incident. When,
A wall surface of the translucent member engaged with the reflection member, the wall surface being arranged in a traveling direction of the light incident on the protrusion, and the reflection surface being inclined in a direction toward the rendering device and incident on the protrusion. An inclined surface (inclined surface HJ511c) that reflects the reflected light toward the rendering device;
An optical path portion (optical path portion HJ512) having a shape in which the light reflected by the inclined surface travels and is bent with respect to the traveling direction of the light;
A light emitting portion (light emitting portion HJ513) which is formed at an end portion of the light path portion in the light traveling direction and has a zigzag shape in a front view cross section;
have.

  According to the above configuration, the light directed to the rear surface side of the light source device is changed in traveling direction to the effect device side by the reflecting portion after being incident on the projecting portion. Since the reflecting portion is arranged so that the reflecting member is engaged with the reflecting portion, light is reflected inside the inner light guiding member. Then, the reflected light reaches the zigzag-shaped light emitting portion after passing through the optical path portion having the bent shape. As a result, the light emitting section is irregularly refracted. With this, various light propagating from the light source of the light emitting device is emitted to the outside, so that it is possible to enhance the performance.

(32-1) Corner translucent member (upper left panel mechanism HB) arranged at a corner position on the front surface side of the upper surface of the casing,
A support member (panel base HH) located behind the corner light-transmitting member,
An outer wall member (top lens cover HA11) that is adjacent to the corner light-transmitting member and engages with the adjacent portion;
Have
The corner translucent member,
A fitting part (fitting part HB11) into which a projecting part (tight screw HH4) arranged so as to project in the front direction from the support member is fitted at the rear surface side position;
A notch formed in the outer wall member, which is arranged at the adjacent portion on the front side of the fitting portion, projects in a direction different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion, and projects in the direction from the placement portion to the outer wall member. A locking piece (locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14) that engages with the (notches HA111, HA112, HA113),
have.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing various effects is known. For example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-013685, a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain only by an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device is achieved through the movement of a movable body. In such a gaming machine, it is known that a side surface or a part of the front surface of the gaming machine is made of a translucent member, and a light source from the inside of the gaming machine irradiates the translucent member to further enhance the effect. .

  However, when simply fixed by a fixing member such as a screw, since the light transmitting member transmits light, the fixing member is visually recognized from the outside, and there is a problem that the appearance of the gaming machine is significantly impaired. In addition, when the translucent member is extended to a location that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside and fixed by the fixing member, there is a problem that installation of a plurality of rendering devices such as the above-described conventional ones or a rendering device that occupies a large space is limited. there were.

  According to the above configuration, the translucent member is adjacent to the outer wall member in the engaged state, and the locking piece of the translucent member is engaged with the cutout portion of the outer wall member. Then, by disposing the projecting portion in the front direction from the supporting member, the projecting portion is fitted into the fitting portion of the translucent member. Since the protruding portion is fitted into the fitting portion of the transparent member, the movement of the transparent member in the vertical direction is restricted. Further, since the fitting direction of the protruding portion and the protruding direction of the locking piece are arranged so as to be different from each other, the translucent member is restricted from moving in the horizontal direction by the support member and the outer wall member. As a result, the translucent member can be easily attached to the gaming machine without using the fixing member and without impairing the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

(32-2)
A frame member (frame portion HB2) for vertically supporting the corner light-transmitting member,
The corner portion light-transmitting member has a regulation portion (regulation portion HB21) that extends along the frame member to the rear position of the frame member at the vertically lower position and that regulates the forward movement of itself. is doing

  According to the above configuration, since the translucent member is supported by the frame member in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the stress in the vertical direction on the protrusion and the fitting portion into which the protrusion is fitted. Further, since the restricting portion of the translucent member is arranged at the rear position of the frame member, the forward movement of the translucent member itself is restricted, and the stress in the horizontal direction on the locking piece and the notch can be reduced. it can. As a result, deterioration of the transparent member and the structure related to the transparent member can be reduced.

(33-1) A door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing,
It has a decorative protrusion protruding forward from the upper part of the door,
A light guide plate (top lens light guide plate HA14) having a seamless structure in which the decorative convex portion diffuses light and uniformly emits the light from the surface of the decorative convex portion is provided from the front end to the rear end of the decorative convex portion. It is formed by the decoration unit HA1.

  BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-245279, there is known a gaming machine having a front door provided with an effect device. According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform various effects using the effect device, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Since the front door faces the player, it is liable to receive external force due to contact with the player, so it is necessary to ensure durability, but if the layout and design of the production device are emphasized, the front door There is a problem that durability is lowered. In particular, when a convex portion protruding on the front surface is provided, the possibility of contact increases, and therefore durability has been required.

  According to the above configuration, when a plurality of parts are joined to form a light guide plate for a decoration unit, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the parts. In this way, it is possible to avoid the situation where the load is concentrated on one part. As a result, the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit including the light guide plate of the seamless structure has a large rigidity and strength as a whole, and therefore external force is applied by contact with the player located in front of the gaming machine. Even if it does, it becomes difficult to be deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be enhanced.

(33-2) The decoration unit is
A hollow portion is formed by a top lens light guide plate base HA15 connected to the door frame and a top lens cover HA11 that transmits the light to the outside, and the light guide plate is housed in the hollow portion.
The front region is curved downward, and the width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and is formed in a shape having a vertex at the center of the front end,
The back surface of the front region and the frame of the door are connected by a horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism.

  According to the above configuration, by accommodating the light guide plate in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the light guide plate are simply laminated. It is possible to form a decorative protrusion having higher rigidity than in the case of using a plate shape. Also, the bending moment increases as it approaches the front end away from the rear end connected to the door frame, but by reducing the width in the left-right direction on the front end side to reduce the weight, the rigidity and It is possible to increase the strength. Further, the back surface of the front region of the decorative unit that is curved downward is connected to the frame of the door through the horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism, so that the back surface of the front region of the decoration unit is supported by the decoration unit support mechanism. Since it is supported in the horizontal direction, the front region has a large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction. As a result, even if an external force is applied to the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit from a player or the like, the decorative convex portion is unlikely to be deformed or damaged, and as a result, the door can have high durability. It has become.

(33-3) A door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing,
It has a decorative protrusion protruding forward from the upper part of the door,
The decorative protrusion is
A top lens light guide plate base connected to the door frame, a top lens light guide plate HA14 for diffusing light and emitting the light uniformly from the surface, and a top lens cover for transmitting the light to the outside,
The decorative unit has a width in the left-right direction reduced from the door side to the front end side and is formed in a shape having an apex at the center of the front end.

  According to the above configuration, the bending moment increases as it approaches the front end part that is farther from the rear end part that is connected to the door frame. It is also possible to increase the strength. As a result, the decorative convex portion has a large rigidity and strength in the front region, and thus is less likely to be deformed or damaged even when an external force is applied due to contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to increase the durability of the door.

(33-4) The decoration unit is
A hollow portion is formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, and the top lens light guide plate is housed in the hollow portion.

  According to the above configuration, by accommodating the top lens light guide plate in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the top lens light guide plate are simplified. Since the second moment of area is larger than that in the case of laminating it into a plate shape, it is possible to form a decorative protrusion having high rigidity.

(33-5) In the decoration unit, the front region is curved downward,
The back surface of the front region of the decoration unit and the frame of the door are connected by a horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism.

  According to the above configuration, the back surface of the front region of the decoration unit, which is curved downward, is connected to the frame of the door through the horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism, so that the back surface of the front region of the decoration unit is decorated. The unit is supported horizontally by the unit support mechanism. As a result, the decorative convex portion having the decoration unit and the decoration unit support mechanism has a large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction in the front area, and therefore external force is applied by contact with the player located in front of the gaming machine. Even if it does, it becomes difficult to be deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be enhanced.

(33-6) An irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light in the direction of the screen device C that is arranged obliquely downward and rearward is disposed behind the decorative convex portion.

  According to the above configuration, since a large space can be secured behind the decorative convex portion, the size and degree of freedom of the irradiation light device can be increased, and the decorative convex portion has high rigidity and strength. The irradiation light device can be sufficiently protected.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments described above, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are provided at predetermined positions in the display unit A. It is fixed. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet 21. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21 of the gaming machine 1, by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD open, the light reflection direction (angle) is changed. Can be adjusted. As a result, the projection position can be adjusted even when the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate.

  In the above-described first and second embodiments, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have been described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, the mirror mechanism, and the various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the gaming machine without being unitized.

  Further, in the above-described first and second embodiments, the case where the present invention is applied to the pachi-slot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention is applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines and slot machines). It is also possible.

  Although the first and second embodiments of the present invention have been described above, they merely exemplify specific examples and do not particularly limit the present invention. Specific configurations of each means and the like can be appropriately designed and changed. is there. Further, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumeration of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

  Further, in the above detailed description, the characteristic portions are mainly described so that the present invention can be more easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the above detailed description, but can be applied to other embodiments, and its applicable range is various. Further, the terms and the terminology used in this specification are used for accurately explaining the present invention and are not used for limiting the interpretation of the present invention. Further, it seems easy for those skilled in the art to infer other configurations, systems, methods, etc. included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in the present specification. Therefore, the description of the scope of claims should be considered to include an equivalent configuration without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. Further, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical contents and the essence of the present application by the patent office and general public institutions, and engineers belonging to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms or technical terms. Therefore, it is possible to make a quick decision by conducting a detailed survey. Therefore, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the description of the claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the effects peculiar to the present invention, it is desired that the literatures already disclosed be sufficiently taken into consideration for interpretation.

  The above detailed description includes the processes executed by the computer. The above description and expressions are provided for the purpose of making the most efficient understanding by those skilled in the art. As used herein, each process used to derive a result of 1 should be understood as a process that is self-consistent. Further, in each process, transmission or reception of an electrical or magnetic signal, recording, etc. are performed. In the processing in each processing, such signals are represented by bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are used only for convenience of description. There is a need. In addition, although the processing in each processing may be described in an expression that is common to human behavior, the processing described in this specification is, in principle, executed by various devices. Further, other configurations required for performing each processing will be obvious from the above description.

1 Gaming Machine 21 Cabinet A Display Unit B Irradiation Light Device C Screen Device D Fixed Screen Mechanism E1 Front Screen Mechanism F1 Reel Screen Mechanism UD Upper Door Mechanism DD Lower Door Mechanism

Claims (1)

A first movable body and a second movable body each operable between a first position and a second position different from each other;
Drive means for independently driving the first movable body and the second movable body between the first position and the second position;
A detection unit having a sensor A for detecting the first movable body and a sensor B for detecting the second movable body,
The operation range of each of the first movable body and the second movable body partially includes an overlapping range overlapping with each other, and the second positions of the first movable body and the second movable body are, respectively, Exists in the overlapping range in the operating range,
The drive means is
In performing a return operation for returning each of the first movable body and the second movable body to the origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
When either the sensor A or the sensor B is in the detection state as the detection result of the detection means, the first movable body and the second movable body are driven according to the drive procedure according to the detection result. Return to the origin position,
As a result of the detection by the detection means, when neither the sensor A nor the sensor B is in the detection state, one of the first movable body and the second movable body is returned to the origin position. And then driving the other movable body to return to the origin position according to a driving procedure corresponding to the position of the other movable body ,
Further provided with a projector for projecting an image,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be projection targets of the projector, the first position is a position that is different for each movable body outside the projection range of the projector, and the second position is is in the projection range of the projector, Ru position der to said first movable member and the second movable body is a projection target of the projector,
A gaming machine characterized by that.